JP2015110108A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To further enhance interest by correlating execution of a notice performance before start of variation display, where display results in a jackpot pattern, with occurrence of a probability variable jackpot, where a prize winning rate of game balls to variable winning means differs according to a probability variation pattern type.SOLUTION: When jackpot determination based on holding storage determines a jackpot, a notice performance, which reports a jackpot in one vibration or a plurality of vibrations before start of vibration based on the holding storage. A performance, which has the same contents as those of a special performance executed when a two-round sudden probability variable jackpot occurs as the notice performance, is executed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that can be controlled in a specific state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be. Furthermore, a variable display unit capable of variably displaying the identification information is provided, and is configured to be able to be controlled to a specific state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result. There is something.

  The specific state means a state advantageous for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, for example, for example, a state where the state of the variable winning ball apparatus is advantageous for a player who is easy to win a hit (a big hit gaming state), and a right to be advantageous for the player has occurred. This is a state to which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state or a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display unit that displays the identification information (such as symbols) is a combination of specific display modes determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the V zone provided in the big prize opening) is not established at the time when the big prize opening is closed, the big hit gaming state is ended.

  In addition, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) on the variable display section are continuously stopped for a predetermined time, stopped, swung, and enlarged. The possibility of big hits continues before the final result is displayed due to a reduced or deformed state, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol changing. An effect performed in a state in which the player is in a state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. In the reach state, the interest of the game is enhanced by making the variation pattern different from the variation pattern in the normal state. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display portion does not satisfy the condition for reaching the reach state, the state is “missed” and the variable display state is terminated. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

JP 2005-65900 A JP 2004-329876 A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents an excessive sense of expectation and prevents an excessive increase in euphoria.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to a specific state advantageous to a player, wherein variable display of second identification information is possible. Is executed in preference to the variable display of the first identification information, the first hold storage means for storing the variable display of the first identification information that has not started yet as the hold storage, and the second identification information that has not started yet Control is performed in an advantageous state capable of increasing the frequency of execution of variable display of the second identification information, second holding storage means for storing the variable display as the hold storage, determination means for determining whether or not to control the specific display. Advantageous state control means, determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to a specific state before determination by the determination means, and specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means In an advantageous state Unlike the appearance mode and the production mode in the predetermined state, the determination means determines whether or not the hold storage stored in the second hold storage means is controlled in the specific state when the second hold storage means is controlled. It is characterized by determining.

  The advantageous state only needs to be a relatively advantageous state over the predetermined state. For example, if the predetermined state is a normal state, the probability variation state or the short time state is an advantageous state, and the predetermined state is a short time state. For example, the probability variation state is an advantageous state. In addition, “store the right” only needs to store the detection by the detection unit, and it does not matter what kind of information is stored. For example, it includes a case where only the number of start winnings is stored, a case where information on jackpot / outgoing is stored, and a case where a random value used for determining the jackpot is stored. “Many game values” means that a player can obtain a lot of game media. For example, a variable winning device that can change from a closed state that is difficult or unacceptable to a game medium to an open state that can be easily received, is controlled from a closed state to an open state in a specific state, and a predetermined time has elapsed. Or a game machine that executes a round control for controlling the closed state again when the predetermined number of winnings is won, the number of executions is large (the number of rounds is large), and the predetermined time is long (for example, 0.5 seconds and 30 seconds), and by executing control of any one or a plurality of combinations such as a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 5 counts and 9 counts) is different, It is possible to configure so as to obtain many.

  A plurality of types of specific game results (for example, a normal big hit of 15 rounds, a probability change big hit of 15 rounds, a sudden probability change big hit of 2 rounds) are provided as the specific game results, and the notice effect execution means is a specific game by a predetermining means. When it is determined as a result, a notice effect of a different aspect depending on the type of the specific game result to be determined (for example, a notice effect X for confirming a big change jackpot, a notice effect Y for confirming a big hit shown in FIG. (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the judgment type (1) determination table corresponding to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 76 in step S681). The effect pattern of the notice effect is determined, and steps S830 to S83 are performed based on the decided effect pattern of the notice effect. It may be configured to notice to perform the production) as at.

  One right until the specific state that is controlled when the specific game result is reached in the variable display performed by the one right that caused the notice effect to be executed after the notice effect executing means starts the notice effect. Even if it is determined that a specific game result is obtained in a variable display performed with a new right stored later, execution of a notice effect during a variable display with a stored right stored before the new right Specific period notice effect restricting means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S231 and S151A in the game control microcomputer 560) may be provided.

  Variable display pattern type determining means (for example, a part for executing step S101B in the game control microcomputer 560) for determining one of a plurality of variable display pattern types for variable display performed by one right, and a variable display pattern Variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the identification information from the variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the type determining means (for example, the part for executing step S101E in the game control microcomputer 560) Corresponding to the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means, the effect operation executing means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control including the variable display of the identification information during the variable display of the identification information). Perform steps S825 and S844 A portion) may be provided with.

  A plurality of types of effect pattern types (for example, a notification type (1) and a notification type (2)) are provided as the effect pattern types of the notification effect, and an effect pattern type determining means (determining the effect pattern type as one of a plurality of types) For example, the effect pattern determining means (for example, the part that executes step S670 in the effect control microcomputer 100) and the effect pattern determining means for determining the effect pattern from the effect patterns included in the effect pattern type determined by the effect pattern type determining means (for example, And a notice effect executing means executes a notice effect corresponding to the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means (for example, a notice in step S684). Stored in the content buffer or execution count buffer Notice to perform the continuous announcement attraction based on the contents or the number of times of execution) may be configured so.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent an excessive sense of expectation and to prevent excessively high euphoria.

  When a plurality of types of specific game results are provided as specific game results, and the notice effect execution means is determined to be the specific game result by the pre-decision means, different effects depending on the type of the specific game result determined If it is configured to execute the notice effect of the aspect, the player can predict which type of specific game result can be expected depending on the kind of the notice effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  One right until the specific state that is controlled when the specific game result is reached in the variable display performed by the one right that caused the notice effect to be executed after the notice effect executing means starts the notice effect. Even if it is determined that a specific game result is obtained in a variable display performed with a new right stored later, execution of a notice effect during a variable display with a stored right stored before the new right If it is configured to include a notice period limitation means for a specific period that regulates the period, after the notice effect is performed, the notice effect is not executed until the specific state ends, and it is easy to determine whether the notice effect is based on any right Can be recognized.

  Variable display pattern type determining means for determining one of a plurality of variable display pattern types for variable display performed by one right, and variable display patterns included in the variable display pattern type determined by the variable display pattern type determining means A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern of identification information from among the above, and an effect operation including a variable display of the identification information during variable display of the identification information in response to the determination result of the variable display pattern determining means If it comprises so that the production | presentation operation execution means to perform may be provided, even if it will not be in a reach state, for example, even if it will not reach a reach state, it will be possible to perform various productions and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the variable display pattern distribution can be easily set at the time of development, and the development man-hour can be reduced.

  A plurality of types of effect pattern types are provided as the effect pattern types of the notice effect, and included in the effect pattern type determining means for determining the effect pattern type as one of the plurality of effect pattern types and the effect pattern type determined by the effect pattern type determining means An effect pattern deciding means for determining an effect pattern from among the produced effect patterns, and the notice effect executing means is configured to execute the notice effect corresponding to the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means. Various notice effects can be executed without increasing the capacity, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the distribution of the notice effect can be easily set at the time of development, and the development man-hours can be reduced.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pseudo | simulation continuous chance eyes, the development chance eyes, and the chances of surprise. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing diagram showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal constituting a control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows winning effect production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit determination module. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in notice classification (1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in a notice classification (2), and a normal notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in a notice classification (2), and a normal notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the notice effect at the time of jackpot and loss in the notice classification (1). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating control, such as winning time effect setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display state when a prize production | presentation setting process etc. are performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the special production for sudden probability big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the notice effect of the same content as the special effect for sudden probability big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the notice effect of the same content as the special effect for sudden probability big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the notice effect for sudden probability big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display state of the notice effect for sudden probability big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display state when changing to a time-short state or a latent probability change state. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number updated on the production control board side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a promotion production execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the judgment classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the judgment table for notice classification (1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the judgment table for notice classification (2). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the number of holding | maintenance memory | storage, and the frequency | count of continuous notice execution. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of a continuous notice. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice selection process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the main notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows reach production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of sound number data. It is a timing chart showing an example of the relationship between the control of the game control means and the effect control means related to the continuous notice, the transmission timing of the effect control command, and the operation of the effect means. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. 10 is a flowchart showing start port switch passage processing in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a part of command analysis processing according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing conditions for turning on and off the effect variation flag and the rush probability flag in the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a part of command analysis processing according to the third embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a part of command analysis processing according to the fourth embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing a prize-time effect setting process in the fifth embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the judgment table for notice classification (1) at the time of the probability change state in Embodiment 6. 18 is a flowchart showing a big hit end process in the seventh embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols in synchronization with the variable symbol special display. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, three pieces of decoration (effect) identification information “left”, “middle”, and “right” are variably displayed so as to move from top to bottom, for example. There are “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (symbol display lines) 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect symbol display area. The positions of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R are effect display. The display screen of the device 9 may not be fixed, and the three areas of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the special control indicator 8 performs variable display of the special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be grasped. Can be easier.

  A special symbol display 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the left side of the lower part of the game board 6. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the special symbol display 8 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the special symbol display 8 is a special four-display unit that displays the number of effective winning balls that have entered the starting winning opening, that is, the number of reserved memories (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting prize memory). A symbol hold storage indicator 18 is provided. The special symbol storage memory display 18 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the special symbol display 8 is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with an area for displaying the number of reserved memories (hereinafter referred to as a reserved storage display unit 18c).

  The special symbol variable display is a variable display start condition after the start condition which is the variable display execution condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14). (For example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the special symbol variable display is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started and variable When the display time elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped (determined).

  In the special symbol display 8, when a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is stopped (derived display). If it is decided to win, a special special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed. If it is determined to be off, special symbols other than the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. In this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “3” and “7” are jackpot symbols, and symbols indicating “−” are off symbols.

  When the big winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 8, the open / close plate in the variable winning ball device 20 generates a predetermined number (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls. The round in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is started in the open state until the period up to. The number of rounds is, for example, 15.

  In addition, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the short time state. In the short time state, the variation time of the special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state (the state that is not the probability variation state or the short time state). The time-short state is, for example, when one of the conditions is satisfied first, that is, the variable display of a special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit”. To finish. In addition, after the big hit state is ended, the normal state may be set instead of the time reduction state.

  When it is determined to control the gaming state to the probability changing state, the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result. A special symbol stop symbol derived and displayed when it is determined to control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state is referred to as a big hit symbol. The special symbol stop symbol that is derived and displayed when it is determined not to control the gaming state to the big hit state is referred to as an outlier symbol.

  Further, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining a big hit is higher than in the low probability state (normal state). For example, it is 10 times. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a big hit when it matches the value of the random number for jackpot determination is 10 times that in the normal state. In addition, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. That is, the second start winning opening 14 is easy to open, and a start winning is likely to occur. Specifically, in the probability variation state, the number of determination values determined to be a hit when it matches the value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is larger than that in the normal state. Further, in addition to increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, or the number of opening and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may increase. Further, even in the short time state, the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the number of opening or the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased, and the number of opening and opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. You may spend more time.

  The effect display device 9 performs variable display of the effect symbol as a symbol for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the special symbol display 8 stops displaying the jackpot symbol, the effect display device 9 stops displaying the combination of effect symbols reminiscent of the big hit.

  In the display area of the effect display device 9, based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the effect symbols start to change in the symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right”. For example, “left” → The stop symbols of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the order of “right” → “middle”.

  The period from the start of variable display of the production symbol until the stop symbol is derived and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (variable display period = variable time). The variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. The reach state is a display state in which the variation of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, or This is a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and the opening / closing plate is opened by the solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (a big hit gaming state) that occurs when a specific display result (a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8. By controlling to the state, the big winning opening which becomes the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state where the probability of being determined to be a big hit as compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  A decorative lamp (LED may be used) 25 flashed and displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. . In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame lamp (or LED) 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a or the second start opening switch 14a, it is in a state where variable symbol display can be started ( For example, when the special symbol variable display ends and the start condition is satisfied), the effect display device 9 starts variable effect symbol display. That is, the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning at the start winning opening. If the special symbol variable display cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of reserved memories has not reached the upper limit.

  Next, the type of jackpot and the jackpot will be described.

  When the special symbol stop symbol becomes a probability variation symbol (excluding a sudden probability variation symbol described later) of the jackpot symbol, it shifts to a jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as probability variation jackpot). In other words, the special variable prize-winning device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning device 20 is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins a big winning opening. In this embodiment, when the stop symbol is changed to the probability winning symbol (excluding a sudden probability varying symbol described later), the jackpot gaming state is continued for 15 rounds.

  Further, when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a non-probable variation symbol of the big hit symbol, it shifts to a big hit gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a non-probable variable big hit or a normal big hit). In other words, the special variable prize-winning device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the big prize opening. In this embodiment, the big hit gaming state is continued for 15 rounds even when the big winning gaming state is shifted based on the fact that the stop symbol has become an uncertain variable symbol.

  In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol becomes a special probability variation symbol (hereinafter referred to as a sudden probability variation symbol), a special jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “sudden probability variation symbol”) that allows the player to recognize that the gaming state has suddenly shifted to the probability variation state. It is called probable big hit.) In the sudden probability change big hit, the special variable winning device 20 is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In the sudden probability change big hit, the special variable winning device 20 is opened until it is closed for one round, and the game state of the sudden probability change big hit is continued for two rounds. When a sudden big odd hit is generated, unlike the big round of 15 rounds, the stage display is not proceeding in turn on the stage display device 9, but the game state seems to have suddenly shifted to the rounded state. A special effect (see FIG. 45) for showing to the person is executed.

  In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol becomes a small hit symbol, the special variable winning device 20 is shifted to a gaming state in which the special variable winning device 20 is opened twice only for a short period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this way, in the small hit game state, the same game value as the game value given to the player when a sudden probability change big hit occurs is given. However, unlike the case of sudden probability change big hit, the gaming state is not shifted to the probability changing state after the small hit gaming state ends. From this, the player expects the occurrence of a probable big hit suddenly rather than the small hit. Even when a small hit occurs, a special effect similar to that at the time of sudden big odd hit is executed. Such a special effect is called a two-round effect.

  Next, game state transition will be described.

(1) When the game is in the normal state or in the short-time state, the winning game is a big hit with the probability change symbol (excluding the sudden probability change symbol). As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 (either one or both of the background image and the background color) is changed to a background indicating that the probability change state is being established.

(2) In the probability variation state, the probability variation symbol (excluding sudden probability variation symbol) is a big hit, and when the big hit game ends, the probability variation state is maintained without change. As a result, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol and the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is continuously increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It is done. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the probability changing state is in effect.

(3) In the normal state or the short-time state, a big hit is suddenly made with the probability variation symbol, and when the big-hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted from the normal state or the short-time state to the positive variation state. As a result, the probability that the special symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol become a winning symbol is increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

(4) When the probability change state suddenly becomes a big hit with a probability change symbol, and when the big hit game ends, the probability change state is maintained without changing. As a result, the probability that the stop symbol of the special symbol and the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol is continuously increased, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. It is done. It should be noted that after the sudden change game is suddenly ended, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be changed to the certainty state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

(5) A big hit is made with a non-probable variable in the normal state or the time-saving state, and when the big-hit game is ended, the time-short state is controlled by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. That is, when the gaming state is the normal state, the transition is made from the normal state to the short time state by a predetermined number of fluctuations, and when the gaming state is the short time state, the short time state is continued for a predetermined number of fluctuations. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the time is being reduced. Then, when the fluctuation of the predetermined number of fluctuations is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state. At this time, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that it is in a normal state.

(6) A big hit is made with a non-probability variable symbol in the probability changing state, and when the big hit game is ended, the time is controlled to be reduced by a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) after the big hit. In other words, the state is shifted from the probability variation state to the short time state by a predetermined number of times of variation. At this time, the variation time of the special symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are also increased. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the time is being reduced. Then, when the fluctuation of the predetermined number of fluctuations is started, the gaming state is shifted from the short time state to the normal state. At this time, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that it is in a normal state.

(7) In the normal state, the short time state, or the probability changing state, the small hit symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game ends, the normal state, the short time state, or the probability changing state is continued without change. In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the production mode is changed to the production mode (chance mode) that expects the production mode to be shifted to the certain change state. In addition, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to a background indicating that the chance mode is being performed.

  The transition of the gaming state as described above is an example, and the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  In this embodiment, control that hides that the game state has been changed to the probability change state at a predetermined rate even though the game has been changed to the probability change state due to the end of the jackpot game after the big hit game is ended. (See FIG. 43). That is, a non-probable variable symbol is derived and displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol (note that the special symbol stop symbol derives and displays the probability variable symbol), and after the big hit game, the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is displayed. It changes to the background which shows that it is in a time-short state, and the production control which makes it appear that it has shifted to the time-short state is performed. In this way, a gaming state in which effect control that makes it appear that the state has been shifted to the time-short state despite the transition to the probability variation state is referred to as a latent probability variation state. Even if the background indicating that the time is short is displayed by transitioning to the latent probability variation state at a predetermined rate after the probability variation big hit game is over, the player may have transitioned to the probability variation state. The expectation that it cannot be done can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the probable change symbol of the production symbol is a combination of “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7”, and the non-probability variable symbol is “2” “4”. “6” “8” is the combination of the same even number of the same symbols. For example, the odd variation of “3”, “5”, “7” is the same as the odd variation of the production symbol. The combination is a combination of non-probable symbols with an even number of the same symbols “4”, “6”, and “8”, and a combination of the same symbols of “1” and “2” is also a probability variable symbol. A jackpot symbol that is not a non-probable variable (a jackpot symbol that cannot be recognized as to whether or not it is probable) may be used. In this case, when the big jackpot and the probable variation jackpot are determined, the jackpot symbol ("1" or "2") which is not a probability variation symbol nor a non-probability variation symbol at a predetermined ratio (for example, determined by random lottery or the like). ), It is not possible to know whether the gaming state has shifted to the short-time state or to the probabilistic state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the time-short state and the latent probability changing state (that is, the gaming state has been apparently shifted to the time-short state, but is actually shifted to the time-short state or the probability changing state (latent probability changing state). A notification effect (also referred to as a suggestion effect) that suggests that there is a possibility of being shifted to a certain change state. In the notification effect, an effect capable of recognizing whether the possibility that the operation button 120 has been operated (pressed) by the player is high or low is likely to be changed to the probability change state is executed (for example, You ’ll see a comment that shows if it ’s likely or not likely that you ’re in a probable state). In addition, as the notification effect, a series of related effects are continuously executed over a plurality of variations.

  In addition, even when the game is suddenly shifted to the chance mode after the probabilistic big hit and small hit games are finished, a notification effect (also referred to as a suggestive effect) is executed to suggest that there is a possibility that the game has been changed to the probability change state. You may do it.

  Next, the display of the effect symbols (variable display, stop display, temporary stop display), stop symbols and the like in the effect display device 9 will be described.

  In the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9, variable display of the effect symbols is performed in response to the variable symbol special display by the special symbol indicator 8. That is, in the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9, “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect symbol display area based on the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. In each of the effect symbol display areas, the variation of the effect symbol is started, and for example, a fixed effect symbol that is a variable display result of the effect symbol in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “medium” is stopped and displayed (derived display). To do. The procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed effect symbol is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the effect symbol in a predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. In each of the “middle” and “right” effect symbol display areas, there may be included one that stops and displays the effect symbols that become the confirmed effect symbols at the same time.

  In the period from the start of variable display of the production symbol to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the finalized design symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” production symbol display areas, the variable display of the production symbol The state may become a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state refers to an effect symbol that is not yet stopped when the effect symbol stopped and displayed on the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas) constitutes a predetermined jackpot combination. In the remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect symbol display area, etc.) that has not yet been stopped when the effect symbol (for example, an effect symbol indicating “7” alphanumeric characters) is stopped, In the display state where is changing, or in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, all or part of the effect symbols change in synchrony while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination Is in the display state. Corresponding to the reach state, the effect display device 9 displays a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol, changes the display mode of the background image, There are cases where the pattern variation is changed. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, the variable display state of the production symbol may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”. In some cases, a specific effect for informing the player is made depending on a variable display mode of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train (chance eyes)”, “main notice”, “development chance eyes”, and “end of development chance eyes” are set to be executable. In addition, the specific effect in this embodiment should just change a special figure fluctuation time according to whether a corresponding effect operation is performed. For example, when the specific effect is executed, it is only necessary that the special figure change time becomes longer than when the specific effect is not executed.

  In the specific effect of “slip”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “left”) are displayed. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of effect symbol display areas in the temporarily stopped display of the effect symbol display areas (For example, one or both of the “left” effect symbol display area and the “right” effect symbol display area, or both) An effect display is performed. In the temporary stop display, while the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display or changing the effect symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the produced design symbol is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the effect symbol may be re-fluctuated after the effect symbol is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed is confirmed.

  In the specific effect of “pseudo-ream (chance eye)”, “left”, “one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game (an example of a variable display game) are established once, After changing the production symbols in all of the “middle” and “right” production symbol display areas, the production symbols are temporarily stopped in all the production symbol display areas, and then in all the production symbol display areas. The effect display for changing the effect symbol again (pseudo continuous fluctuation) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the specific effect of “pseudo ream (chance eyes)”, the pseudo ream chance eyes GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 2 (A) are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. A production symbol constituting either one is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” effect symbol display area, and “middle symbol” is displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  In the specific effect of “Main notice”, the effect symbols are changed in all the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the confirmed effect symbols are displayed in all effect symbol display areas. Before the stop display (final stop display), for example, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state by the effect display that is associated with the reach effect in advance or the effect display that is different from the effect display that is associated in advance. An effect display for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “big hit” is performed as an effect operation that becomes the main notice effect.

  For the specific effects of “Development Opportunities”, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” and then predetermined in all effect symbol display areas. After the effect symbols constituting the development chance included in the special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined reach effect is started with the variable display state of the effect symbols as the reach state. As an example, in the specific production of “Development Chance”, any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 2B is configured in the “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” production symbol display areas. The effect design to be displayed is temporarily stopped. Therefore, when any of the development chances HC1 to HC8 is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state, or the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. The expectation of the player is raised.

  In the specific production of “End of Development Opportunity”, the production symbols are changed in all of the production symbol display areas of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” and then developed in all the production symbol display areas. An effect display is performed in which an effect symbol of a predetermined combination as a chance is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). As an example, in the specific effect of “end of development opportunity”, one of the development chance items HC1 to HC8 temporarily stopped and displayed in the specific effect of “development opportunity” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol.

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production and the specific production, for example, by displaying other than the variable display mode of the production symbol, such as displaying a predetermined character image or message image, A sub-notice effect may be executed to notify the player that the variable display state may be a reach state and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. In this embodiment, sub-notice effects such as “character display”, “step-up image”, and “mail display” are set to be executable. It should be noted that the sub-notice effect in this embodiment is not particularly limited as long as the change time of the special symbol does not change depending on whether or not the corresponding effect operation is executed.

  In the “character display” sub-notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, and then two or more effect symbol display areas (for example, “ Effect display for displaying a character image prepared in advance in a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 9 before the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas, etc. .

  In the sub-notification effect of “Step-up image”, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then in two or more effect symbol display areas. Before the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect display for switching and displaying a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order may be performed in the display area of the effect display device 9. In the sub-notice effect of “step-up image”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, The effect display in the sub-notice effect may be terminated without switching the image.

  In the “mail display” sub-notice effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and then the effect is displayed in two or more effect symbol display areas. There is an effect display in which the effect operation changes, for example, the display of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 9 is changed in response to the operation button 120 being operated by the player before the symbol is temporarily stopped. Done.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, after the variable display of the production symbol is started, the variable display state of the production symbol does not become the reach state, but the predetermined design. There is a case where the confirmed effect symbol that becomes one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 in the special combination is stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the variable symbol display state has reached the reach state after the variable symbol symbol display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, the determined effect symbol that is a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “3”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the determined effect symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed effect symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are symbol numbers “1” to “1” that are variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9, for example. Among the 8 design symbols, any one of the design symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display area. In this way, the effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped. The variable display mode of the displayed effect symbol is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a probability variable big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “7”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or after the reach effect is not executed, the predetermined probability variation big hit combination The finalized design that becomes Here, the confirmed effect symbols that are probable big hit combinations are symbol numbers “1” to “1” that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas in the effect display device 9, for example. Among the 8 design symbols, any one of the design symbols with odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. What is necessary is just to be stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the effect symbol display area. The effect symbols whose odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect is The variable display mode of the effect symbol in which the confirmed effect symbol of the probability variation jackpot combination is displayed without being executed is referred to as the variable display mode of “first probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a probability variable big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “7”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a reach effect different from the case where the variable display mode is “normal” is executed, a fixed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation big hit combination may be stopped and displayed. . In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after a reach production different from the case where the variable display mode of the production symbol is “normal” is executed, The variable display mode of the production symbol in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a “second probability variation” variable display mode when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a probability variable big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “7”) among the special symbols that become the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is Corresponding to reaching the reach state, the normal jackpot combination is confirmed after the reach effect is executed, which is the same as when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal”, or the reach effect is not executed. The effect design may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect similar to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” is executed, or the reach effect Is not executed, and the variable display mode of the effect symbol in which the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is referred to as a variable display mode of “third probability variation” when the variable display result is “big hit”. .

  As described above, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed effect symbol that is the probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed by variable display of the effect symbol. , It is determined that the probability change state is reached after being controlled to the 15 round big hit state. On the other hand, when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “third probability variation”, the final effect that is a normal jackpot combination in the variable display of the effect symbol is the same as when the variable display mode is “normal”. The symbol is stopped and displayed. For this reason, when the variable display mode is “third probability variation”, the player cannot recognize whether or not the probability variation state is obtained from the variable display result of the effect symbol. In other words, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the probability variation jackpot combination is included in the specific display result that is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and is included in the special display result that is determined to be controlled to the probability variation state. On the other hand, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is included in the specific display result other than the special display result that is not determined to be controlled to the probability variation state.

  When a 2 round big hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating a number of “5”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol is not in the reach state, A finalized design that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, or a finalized design that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. 2B is stopped or displayed, or FIG. ) May be stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chances of success TC1 to TC4. Note that the chances of success TC <b> 1 to TC <b> 4 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination. In addition, when a 2 round jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “5”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. Correspondingly, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the effect symbols in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When a small hit symbol (for example, a special symbol indicating the number “1”) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it is the same as when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise”. After the effect symbols are variably displayed, the confirmed effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is stopped or displayed, or the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. May be displayed in a stopped state, or a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined reach combination may be displayed in a stopped state. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game being a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a small hit symbol, the variable display mode of the effect symbols in which various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed is as follows. This is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. Here, the confirmed effect symbol that is one of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 2C is stopped and displayed only when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “surprise”, and the variable display mode is “small”. In the case of “winning” or the like, it is not stopped and displayed as a confirmed effect symbol. In other words, when a confirmed effect symbol that is one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display result may be “big hit” due to the variable display mode of “accuracy”. Determine. After the variable display result is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state in which the variable winning action similar to the two round big hit state is performed, and when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, the gaming state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” continues.

  When the variable display mode of the effect symbol when the variable display result is “big hit” is any one of “normal”, “first probability variation”, and “third probability variation”, during the variable display of the effect symbol, There is a case where a promotion effect during change as a specific change display is executed. In the fluctuating promotion effect, after the effect symbols that are normally a big hit combination are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the effect display device 9, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right effect symbol display areas, the same effect symbols are all changed again, and the variation is made again. Is stopped and displayed as a finalized design (final stop display). Here, when the changing promotion effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the temporarily changing display is performed as the changing promotion effect. After changing the effect symbol again, a promotion promotion failure effect during change is performed in which the confirmed effect symbol that is normally a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the variable display mode being “first probability change”, the temporarily stopped display effect design is changed again as the changing promotion effect. After the change, the promotion effect during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed effect symbol which becomes the probability variation big hit combination.

  When the variable display result of the variable display result is “big hit”, if the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “normal” or “third probability change”, the variable display result is stopped and displayed for 15 rounds of big hit status After being controlled, the jackpot promotion effect is executed during the period until the 15-round jackpot state ends. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. It may be a period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or effect symbol after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed effect pattern is usually a jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect display device 9 variably displays the effect symbol, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect display device 9 displays an effect image indicating the roulette game. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. In response to the special symbol indicating the number “7” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “third probability variation”. By executing the success promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit gaming state is finished, it is notified that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state. Corresponding to the special symbol showing the number “3” being stopped and displayed as a special symbol in the special figure game, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, By the time the gaming state ends, the success promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, and there is no notification that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols (variable display), a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18 and a normal symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decorative lamp 25 provided on the game board, the frame lamp 28 provided on the frame side, and the like via the lamp driver board 35. In addition, the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 4, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 4 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame lamp 28 based on a signal for driving the lamp. In addition, a current is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  For example, digital data of sound effects (including sound and music) within a predetermined period is stored in the sound data ROM 704 as control data corresponding to sound number data. For example, PCM data is used as the digital data. In this case, the sound effect for one second is represented by 8 bits × 8k (8000) = 64 kbits. In this example, PCM data is used as an example, but other types of digital audio data such as ADPCM data may be used.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) MR1: Determines a special symbol detachment symbol (stop symbol) (for detachment symbol determination)
(2) MR2-1: Determines the type of jackpot ("normal", "first probability variation", "second probability variation", "third probability variation", "surprise probability") when generating the jackpot (for determining the jackpot type)
(3) MR2-2: Determines whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state (whether or not to generate reach) when the big hit determination result is out of place (for reach determination)
(4) MR3: The variation pattern type of the production symbol (special symbol) is determined as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance (for variation pattern type determination).
(5) MR4: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the design symbol (special symbol) (for variation pattern determination)
(6) MR5: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(7) MR6: Determine the initial value of MR5 (for determining MR5 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (3). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(4). In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number (random R) is a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560. The big hit determination random number is generated by the game control microcomputer 560 as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated based on a program may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control is performed in accordance with winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  In step S32, instead of starting the variation of the special symbol based on the start flag being set, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation processing after the variation pattern is determined (specifically 3) (or a value indicating the display result specifying command transmission process (specifically, 2)), the change of the special symbol may be started. Then, the variation of the special symbol may be stopped based on the value of the special symbol process flag being a value indicating the special symbol stop process (specifically, 4). In that case, the start flag and the end flag are not used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  In step S33, instead of starting the change of the normal symbol based on the start flag being set, the value of the normal symbol process flag becomes a value indicating the normal symbol changing process. Ordinary symbol variation may be started. Then, the fluctuation of the normal symbol may be stopped based on the value of the normal symbol process flag being a value indicating the normal symbol stop process. In that case, the start flag and the end flag are not used.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. The big hit determination table is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with a random R (random number for big hit determination) updated within a numerical range of 0 to 65535 are set (FIG. 8A (B)). The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table (see FIG. 8A) used in a normal state or a short time state, and a probable change big hit determination table (see FIG. 8B) used in a probability change state. . The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 8A and 8B are the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value. The CPU 56 compares the value of the random R with the jackpot determination value, and determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit if the value of the random R matches any one of the jackpot determination values. Further, the CPU 56 compares the random R value with the small hit determination value, and determines that the small hit is made when the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values.

  The jackpot type determination table includes each jackpot type (“normal”, “first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”, “surprise”) compared with the random number for determining the jackpot type (MR2-1). FIG. 8C is a table in which determination values to be allocated are set (FIG. 8C). When it is determined to win the jackpot based on the random R, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determining random number. Here, the jackpot type and the special jackpot symbol correspond to each other. Specifically, when “normal jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) is “3”. When “probability big hit (first probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, third probability variation big hit)” is determined as the big hit type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) becomes “7”. When “suddenly promising big hit” is determined as the big hit type, the special symbol stop symbol (determined special symbol) is “5”.

  If it is determined to be a small hit based on the random R, the special symbol stop symbol is automatically determined to be “1” (without using the big hit type determining random number). If it is decided to make a deviation based on the random R, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “−” are used as the special symbol stop symbols based on the random symbol for determining the loss symbol. "Is determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the display result of the variation display of the special symbol is any one of the first probability variation big hit, the second probability variation big hit, the third probability variation big hit, the normal big hit, the sudden probability variation big hit, the small hit or the off It is determined. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. If it matches, it will be decided to be a big hit or a small hit with respect to the special symbol.

  9 and 10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the variation pattern (variation time) of the effect symbol used in this embodiment. In FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, “Special figure change time” indicates the change time (variable display period of identification information) of a special symbol. The variation pattern indicates the variation time of the special symbol. Since the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol, the “special symbol variation time” also indicates the variation time of the effect symbol. Hereinafter, it may be expressed simply as a variation pattern of a special symbol or a variation pattern of a production symbol.

  In FIG. 9, symbol variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the symbol when the variable display result is “losing” is “non-reach” and “reach” are shown. Illustrate. As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-7 and non-reach PB1-1 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. Variation patterns of non-reach PB1-2 and non-reach PC1-1 to non-reach PC1-2 are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-8, super PB3-1 to super PB3-5 are provided as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the symbol variable display mode is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  Further, FIG. 10 illustrates a symbol variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, super PA4-4 are provided as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. 1 to Super PA4-8, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-4, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-4, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-4, Super PC4-1 and Super PC4-2, Super PD1- 1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1-2, Super PF1-1 to Super PF1-3, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-4, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-3, Special PG3 1 to special PG3-3 variation patterns are prepared.

  Here, “pseudo continuous fluctuation” means that a plurality of fluctuations are executed by continuously executing a temporary stop and re-variation (variation restart) a predetermined number of times during a single fluctuation of the symbols. This is a change to be shown (that is, a change that makes it be recognized that there is a plurality of fluctuations in a pseudo manner). The fluctuation pattern (such as non-reach PA1-5) of the “pseudo ream (chance eye)” can be temporarily stopped once to three times during the fluctuation of one symbol. This is a variation pattern for notifying (notifying) that the possibility of a big hit is high.

  When receiving the effect control command indicating the variation pattern, the effect control microcomputer 100 responds to the variation pattern indicated by the received effect control command on the effect display device 9 for a time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the received effect control command. Perform different types of display effects. At the same time, an effect using effect parts such as a lamp, LED, and speaker 27 is performed. That is, the fluctuation pattern indicates the fluctuation time and the aspect of the effect.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 54 provided in the game control microcomputer 560 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 56 to make various determinations and determinations. In addition, the ROM 54 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 56 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 31 and a variation pattern storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of effect symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by using eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal (capture instruction signal) that triggers the capture of the effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, each of the first and second bytes of the effect control command data Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. . “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are effect control commands that indicate whether a big hit, a small hit or a loss, and a type of big hit game (a type of big hit). The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C07 (H) are referred to as display result specifying commands.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) for designating display of an initial screen, which is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that designates the display of a power failure recovery screen that is transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Note that the CPU 56 checks a flag (such as a probability change flag or a short time flag) that indicates a gaming state that is backed up when the power is restored from the power failure, and specifies that a different power failure recovery screen is displayed depending on the gaming state. A recovery designation command may be transmitted. Specifically, the command 9200 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a normal state, and the command 9201 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a probable state. The command 9202 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when the power is restored from the power failure is in the short time state, and the command 9203 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state is restored in the chance mode after the power failure. May be. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays a different power failure recovery screen on the effect display device 9 according to the gaming state based on the power failure recovery designation command from the CPU 56.

  Command 93XX (H) is a power failure gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state when a power failure occurs. The CPU 56 confirms a flag (such as a probability change flag or a short time flag) that indicates a gaming state that is backed up when the power is restored from the power failure, and transmits a gaming state designation command during a power failure according to the gaming state. In XX, a value corresponding to the gaming state is set. Specifically, the command 9300 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a normal state, and the command 9301 (H) is transmitted if the gaming state when recovering from a power failure is a probable state. If the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is a short-time state, command 9302 (H) is transmitted. If the gaming state at the time of recovery from a power failure is the chance mode state, command 9303 (H) is transmitted. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 displays a background (background image, background color, etc.) corresponding to the game state on the effect display device 9 based on the game state designation command at the time of power failure from the CPU 56.

  Note that it may not be managed whether the CPU 56 is in the chance mode state. In this case, the chance mode flag is not set in steps S163 and S176, which will be described later, and instead, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the sudden probability change big hit or the small hit has ended in the big hit end processing shown in FIG. If it is suddenly determined that the probability big hit or the small hit has ended, the chance mode flag is set. Then, the effect control CPU 101 controls the background to the background in the chance mode depending on whether or not the chance mode flag is set. In the case of such a configuration, the CPU 56 does not need to transmit a power failure gaming state designation command (9303 (H)) indicating that the gaming state at the time of power failure recovery is the chance mode state.

  Command 9500 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is a probability change state. Command 9502 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the time-short state. Command 9503 (H) is an effect control command (chance mode state background designation command) for designating display of a background when the gaming state is the chance mode state. Commands 9500 (H) to 9503 (H) are referred to as background designation commands.

  When the CPU 56 does not manage whether or not it is in the chance mode state, the CPU 56 does not need to transmit a chance mode state background designation command (9503 (H)) indicating that the gaming state is the chance mode state. .

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14, commands A001 to A004 (H) display a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a big hit game (or a small hit game) (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) It is. The jackpot start designation commands include jackpot start 1 designation to jackpot start 4 designation commands depending on the type of jackpot. Of these, the big hit start 1 designation command A001 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a normal big hit (non-probability variable big hit) game. The big hit start 2 designation command A002 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a small hit game. The big hit start 3 designation command A003 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a probable big hit game. The big hit start 4 designation command A004 (H) is an effect control command for designating the start of a sudden probability change big hit (two round big hit) game.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the non-probability variable big hit end screen, that is, specifying the end of the big hit game, and specifying that it is a non-probable variable big hit (normal big hit) (a big hit end 1 designation command) : Ending 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) displays a probability variation jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the end of jackpot game and designating that the probability variation jackpot has been reached (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command) It is. Command A303 (H) displays an abrupt probability change jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command (designating ending 3 designation command: ending 3 designation) designating the end of jackpot game and designating that sudden probability change jackpot Command). In this embodiment, the effect control command for displaying the small hit end screen, that is, the end of the small hit game is not provided, but such a command may be provided.

  The command C301 (H) is an effect control command for designation of losing (decision designation command for winning determination), and C302 (H) is an effect control command for designation of a normal jackpot winning (ordination determination normal jackpot designation command), C303 ( H) is an effect control command (first winning variable determination first probability variable big hit designation command) designated with first probability variation big win winning, and C304 (H) is an effect control command (second winning determination first certain variation big winning winning decision). Designation command), C305 (H) is an effect control command for designating a third probability variation jackpot winning prize (a third probability variable jackpot designation command for determination at the time of winning), and C306 (H) is an effect control command for designation of a sudden probability variation jackpot winning ( C302 (H) is an effect control command for designating a small winning prize (a small judgment at the time of winning). Ri is the designated command).

  Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (pending storage number designation command) for designating an increase (increase by 1) in the number of reserved memories. Command E100 (H) is an effect control command (pending storage count subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating an increase in the reserved memory number 1 when a start winning is generated, but stores the increased reserved memory number as a reserved memory. It may be specified by a number specification command. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a reserved memory number subtraction designation command when subtracting the reserved memory number, but does not use the reserved memory number subtraction designation command and subtracts the reserved memory number. The number of reserved memories after subtraction may be specified by a reserved memory number designation command.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. To do.

  15 and 16 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process (step S27) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening is executed.

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 or that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if the first start winning or the second starting winning is generated, the start opening switch passing process is executed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), a special symbol is displayed by the timer (stop time timer). The time (symbol stop time) for stopping the stop symbol is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, if the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a presentation control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the presentation control, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that although the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game when starting the first round.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved memory number counter for counting the reserved memory number is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (step S211). If the value of the pending storage number counter is the upper limit value, the process is terminated.

  If the value of the reserved memory number counter is not the upper limit value, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S212). Further, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers (random 2, 3: refer to FIG. 6), and corresponds them to the value of the pending storage number counter as the extracted random number value. Processing for storing in the storage area in the hold storage buffer is executed (step S213). In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the reserved storage number are secured. Note that a counter for generating software random numbers, a reserved storage buffer, and a reserved storage number counter are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Next, the number of displays on the special symbol hold memory display 18 is increased by 1 (step S214), and a control for transmitting a hold memory number designation command is performed (step S215). On the other hand, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (probability change state) (step S216), the CPU 56 executes a winning effect setting process (step S217).

  In this embodiment, the winning effect setting process is not executed in the high probability state, but the winning effect setting process may be executed even in the high probability state. However, when the winning effect setting process is executed even in the high probability state, the process of step S217 (specifically, the process of steps S251 to S253 shown in FIG. 19 executed in the process of step S222 shown in FIG. 18). ), The jackpot determination table (normal jackpot determination table or probability change jackpot determination) used in the process of step S222 (called in step S62 shown in FIG. 31) executed when the fluctuation is actually started. In order to use the same jackpot determination table as the table), the actual variation based on the start winning that is the current determination target is started in consideration of the random number value in the already stored storage. After grasping the game state (probability change state or normal state) at the time, the normal time big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table Carry out the process of selecting a bull.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. . And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a winning effect setting process. The effect process at the time of winning is a process for determining whether or not a big win occurs for the start winning before the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol based on the start winning is actually started. When it is determined that a big hit will occur, a predetermined effect (notice effect) is executed as described later.

  In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the value of the reserved memory number counter is 1 (step S220). If the value of the pending storage number counter is 1, the process is terminated. That the value of the reserved memory number counter is 1 means that the effect setting process at the time of winning is executed for the start winning that occurs when the value of the reserved memory number counter is 0. In that case, since the execution condition (starting condition, that is, start winning) of the effect design is satisfied when the data indicating that there is no reservation storage is stored in the storage number counter, the predetermined effect Is never executed. This is because even if the predetermined effect is executed, the effect and the change that makes the display result a big hit symbol are executed at the same time, and there is no meaning of the predetermined effect. Therefore, if the value of the on-hold storage number counter is 1, the subsequent process in the winning effect process is not executed.

  If the value of the reserved memory number counter is not 1, the CPU 56 reads the value of random R (big hit determination random number) from the reserved memory buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved memory number counter (step S221), and the step in FIG. The jackpot determination module that is also used in S62, that is, the jackpot determination module that is also used when a change is actually started is executed. That is, the jackpot determination subroutine is called (step S222). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the command transmission prohibition flag is set (step S223). If the command transmission prohibition flag is set, the process ends. However, if the big hit determination flag is set, the big hit determination flag is reset (step S224).

  When the command transmission prohibition flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit determination flag is set (step S225). When the big hit determination flag is not set (in the big hit determination module, when the big hit determination flag is not set), control is performed to transmit the winning determination determination designation command to the effect control board 80 (step S232).

  When the big hit determination flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type (ordinary big hit) based on the random 2 value and the determination value set in the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. , First probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, second probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) are determined (step S227). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the determination value matching the random 2 value is selected.

  Winning determination result designation command according to the determination result of the jackpot type in step S227 (winning determination normal jackpot designation command, winning judgment first probability variable jackpot designation command, winning judgment second probability variable jackpot designation command, winning judgment Control is performed to transmit a third probability variable jackpot designation command or a winning decision sudden probability variation jackpot designation command) (step S228). Then, the process proceeds to step S231.

  In step S231, the CPU 56 sets a command transmission prohibition flag.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination module. In the jackpot determination process, the CPU 56 first executes a jackpot determination at the time of winning (a jackpot determination at step S222 in the effect setting process at the time of winning) or a jackpot determination at the start of fluctuation (the jackpot determination at step S62 in the special symbol normal process). ) Is confirmed (step S250). When it is confirmed that it is a jackpot determination at the time of winning a prize, it is decided to use the normal time jackpot determination table (left side of FIG. 8A) (step S253). When it is confirmed that it is a jackpot determination at the start of variation, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S251). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation flag is set. If it is in the probability variation state, it is determined to use the probability variation big hit determination table (right side of FIG. 8A) (step S252). If it is not the probability variation state, it is decided to use the normal big hit determination table (the left side of FIG. 8A) (step S253).

  Then, it is determined whether or not a determination value that matches the value of the random R stored in the random number buffer is in the jackpot determination table (step S254), and if there is a matching determination value, it is determined to be a jackpot (step S255). ), A big hit determination flag is set (step S256). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the determination value that matches the random R value is in the jackpot determination table, but it is confirmed whether or not the random R value is within a predetermined range. It may be.

  20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S52). Then, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S53). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To store. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the reserved storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S54). In addition, the number of displays on the special symbol storage memory display 18 is reduced by 1 (step S55).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with the big hit determination random number, and determines that the big hit (normal big hit or probability variation big hit) or small hit is made if they match. It is a program that executes

  When the gaming state is a probable change state, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value is set as shown in FIG. In the case of a non-probable variation state, the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 8A is set is used.

  When it is determined to be a big hit (step S63), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display 8 a big hit symbol. It is also a thing.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the big hit type determination random number is read from the random number buffer area (step S72), and based on the big hit type determination random number, using the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. (Probability change "," second probability change "," third probability change "," surprising accuracy ") are determined (step S73). When the big hit type is determined, one of the big hit symbols (any of “3”, “5”, and “7”) as a special symbol corresponding to the big hit type is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when the probability variation big hit (“first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”) is determined, the stop symbol becomes the probability variation symbol (“7”). . In addition, when the normal big hit (“normal”) is determined, the stop symbol becomes the non-probable variable symbol (“3”). When the sudden probability variation big hit (“surprise accuracy”) is determined, the stop symbol suddenly becomes the probability variation symbol (“5”).

  When it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, the CPU 56 determines a probability variation jackpot flag (“first probability variation jackpot flag” corresponding to the type of probability variation jackpot (“first probability variation”, “second probability variation”, “third probability variation”). "" 2nd probability variation big hit flag "" "third probability variation big hit flag") is set (steps S74, S75). If the sudden probability change big hit is determined, the sudden probability big hit flag is set (steps S76 and S77). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S83).

  If it is determined not to be a big hit (N in step S63), if it is determined to be a small hit, the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag (steps S78, S79). Further, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as the small hit symbol (“1”) (step S80). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S83).

  When not making a small hit (N in step S78), the CPU 56 reads out the random symbol for determining the symbol from the random number buffer area (step S81), and determines the stop symbol based on the random symbol for determining the symbol out of step (step S82). . In this case, the off symbol (“2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “9”, “−”) is determined. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S83).

  Next, a determination table (FIGS. 22 to 34) used for selecting a variation pattern in the CPU 56 will be described.

  The determination tables stored in the ROM 54 include jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I shown in FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (F) and FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (C). The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I indicate that when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is based on the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Depending on the determination result of the jackpot type, it is selected as a use table. Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I has a variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprising probability”. The random number value MR3 for determination is changed to normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, super CB3-1 to super CB3-5, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4. -2, special CC 4-1, and special CC 4-2.

  Here, as an example, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit shown in FIG. 22 (A) used when the big hit type is “normal” or “third probability variation”. The normal variation pattern type determination table 132A and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 22B used when the big hit type is “first probability change” include normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. The allocation of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the variation pattern type is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the super CA3 is selected. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type -4. In this way, paying attention to the case where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the variation pattern type determination table for big hit that is selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state 132A to 132D (selected in the normal state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132E to 132H (selected in the probability variation state), big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, 132I (in the short time state) When the selection) is compared with each other, the allocation of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type, and the variation pattern type is different for the variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. A random number value MR3 for determination is assigned. As a result, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of types of jackpot types, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  In particular, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, 132H, 132I used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special When the big hit type is other than “surprise”, such as CC4-1 or special CC4-2, the random number value for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. MR3 is assigned. As a result, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is set to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type is determined to be different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. can do.

  As another example, focusing on the case where the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit shown in FIG. 22 (A) used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state. In the variation pattern type determination table 132A for use and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 22 (E) used when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, the variation patterns of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 are used. The assignment of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type to the type is different. In addition, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E, the super CA3. The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is not assigned to the variation pattern type -3. Thus, paying attention to the case where the big hit type is determined as one of “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”, or “surprise probability”, it is selected according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132E (selected when “normal” or “third probability variation”), jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132F (selected when “first probability variation”), When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C and 132G (selected when “second probability variation”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D, 132H and 132I (selected when “surprise probability”) are compared with each other, pachinko games Determine the variation pattern type for each variation pattern type according to whether the gaming state in the machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state. Are different random value assignment of MR3 of, also, may be assigned a random number value MR3 for determining variation pattern type for different variation pattern type according to the playing state. This makes it possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and is determined to be the same variation pattern type. The ratio can be varied.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA4-1, the special CB4-1, and the special CC4-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 to which the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 24B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132H for use. In the variation pattern type of the special CC4-1 to which the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 24C, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132I for use. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 22 (D), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132H shown in FIG. 23 (B), and FIG. Big hit variation pattern type determination table 132I shown in FIG. 24C, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 24A used when the variable display result is “small hit”, and FIG. ) And the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 24C are set so as to include common variation pattern types.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is determined to be “lost”. 2 is a table referred to for determination based on 2. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C is used depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. Each reach determination table 134A to 134C includes a random number MR2-2 for determination of reach as non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, Determination to be assigned to any one of the determination result indicating that the reach state is not reached such as non-reach HC1-2 and the determination result indicating the reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 Data.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 25A, the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first start winning hold memory number and the second starting winning hold memory number) is “0”. Corresponding to a certain case, values in the range of “1” to “204” among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination are assigned to the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1, while “205” to “239”. The range value is assigned to the determination result of reach HA2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1”, “1” to “217”, which are larger than the number of random number values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 among the random number values MR2-2 for reach determination. Are assigned to the non-reach HA1-2 decision result. Further, in response to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “2”, the number of random values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination is larger than “ A value in the range of “1” to “220” is assigned to the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3. The determination results of non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-3 among the random numbers MR2-2 for reach determination corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4”, respectively. A value in the range of “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of random number values assigned to each of these, is assigned to the determination result of non-reach HA1-4 or non-reach HA1-5. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The percentage of If the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach”, the total When the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C include a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type when the variable display state of the effect symbol is determined to be the reach state. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B according to the determination result of the reach HB2-1. Is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result of the reach HC2-1. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is composed of determination data assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Has been.

  Here, for example, in the setting of the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 26A, “1” to “1” among the random value MR3 for variation pattern type determination corresponding to the determination result of the reach HA2-1. A value in the range of “128” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, while other random values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result of reach HA2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” among the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in accordance with the determination result of reach HA 2-3, a value in the range of “1” to “182” among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. The determination result of the reach HA 2-1 is that the reach determination random number MR 2-2 corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0” by the setting of the reach determination table 134 A shown in FIG. Assigned. As the determination result of the reach HA2-2, the random number value MR2-2 for the reach determination is assigned corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”. The determination result of the reach HA 2-3 is assigned the random value MR2-2 for determining the reach corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4”. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is a predetermined number (for example, “1”) or more, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the “normal” reach production is set to be shorter than the average special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern that executes the reach production other than “normal”. If so, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure variation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate that when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern type is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C include non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, and non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination results indicating that the reach state is not set are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, and non-reach HC1. -1 and non-reach HC1-2, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined as non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-. 3. It is comprised from the data for determination etc. which are allocated to one of the variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in FIGS. 28, 29A and 29B. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C indicate the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-8, and the variation pattern type is super CB3. -1 to Super CB3-5, the hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, The hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is used. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C includes a random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and a plurality of variations corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. It consists of decision data assigned to one of the types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 54 includes loss variation pattern tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. The loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B indicate the variation pattern depending on whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Each loss variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, in the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the loss variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table, and the variation pattern type is determined to be one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as a usage table according to the result. The loss variation pattern determination table 138A corresponds to the case where the random display value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach” according to the variation pattern type. Data for determination to be assigned to any one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. The loss variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type when the variable display result of the effect symbol is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. It consists of data for determination assigned to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  Here, in the setting of the loss variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 30, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-2. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to a variation pattern for executing a specific effect such as reach PA1-7. Also, corresponding to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CB1-2, a specific effect in which a value in the range of “1” to “100” among the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is “end of development chance eyes” is executed. Assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-7. With such a setting, in response to the determination that the variable display result is “lost” and the determination that the variable display state of the production symbol is not the reach state, the variation pattern is set to non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach. It can be decided to reach one of the reach PAs 1-7, and an effect operation as a specific effect can be executed.

  For the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4, non-reach HA1 among the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type in the non-reach variation pattern type variation pattern 136A shown in FIG. A value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned corresponding to −1, and a value in the range of “230” to “241” is assigned to correspond to non-reach HA1-2. Values in the range of “231” to “241” are assigned corresponding to the reach HA1-3, and “237” to “241” corresponding to the non-reach HA1-4 and the non-reach HA1-5, respectively. A range value is assigned. Here, with respect to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 25A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. A value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned to the numerical value MR2-2. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “1”, and “1” to “217” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and “1” to “220” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “3”, and “1” to “230” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. For the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-5, in the reach determination table 134A, the total reserved storage number corresponds to “4” and “1” to “230” among the random numbers MR2-2 for determination of reach. A value in the range is assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is larger than that when the total number of reserved memories is “0”. Lower. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, compared with the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” or “2”, non-reach CA1. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of -4 is low.

  In the example of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. 3.75 seconds, and the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “slip” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach PA1 in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of −5 is 16.70 seconds, the special figure fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-6 in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed is 7.75 seconds, The special figure change time in the change pattern of the non-reach PA 1-7 in which the specific effect “end of development opportunity end” is executed is 9.25 seconds. That is, the special figure change time in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the special figure change time in the change pattern in which the specific effect is not executed. When the total number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than when it is “0”. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than that when it is less than “3”. Thus, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special figure fluctuation time can be shortened as compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the setting of the losing fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 31, the fluctuation for executing the “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 corresponding to the case where the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA2-1. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the pattern. Corresponding to the case of the variation pattern type of super CA2-2, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-4 and the reach effect such as super PA3-5 to super PA3-8. A random number MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA2-3 or Super CB2-1, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is included in the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-5. Assigned.

  In addition, with respect to a variation pattern that executes a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”, such as a variation pattern of super PA 3-4, super PA 3-8, and super PB 3-4, for example, The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-8 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2. The random value MR4 is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB 3-4 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, it corresponds to the case where the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-3 or the super CB 2-1 is set in the loss variation pattern determination table 138B. A random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is assigned.

  For the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-1 and super CA 2-2, the variation pattern type is determined in any of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. A random value MR3 is assigned. Further, the random pattern value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135C shown in FIGS. ing. For the variation pattern type of the super CB2-1, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. As described above, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, the effect in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state. Table data (determination data) is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified according to the type of operation. In addition, in the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, after the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. The table data is configured so that it can be determined as one of the variation pattern types classified by type. As will be described later, the execution control CPU 101 is configured to determine the number of executions of the pseudo-series using a specific effect pattern determination table (FIG. 57B). The number of executions may be determined. For example, in the case of a pseudo-series variation pattern, the number of times of pseudo-series variation may be determined based on a predetermined random number for determining the number of pseudo-series. Moreover, you may divide the variation pattern of a pseudo | simulation series into multiple types according to the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation series. Specifically, with regard to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern (non-reach PA1-5), a variation pattern with one execution (non-reach PA1-5-1) and a variation pattern with two executions (non-reach PA1-5). -2) and a variation pattern (non-reach PA1-5-3) with three executions. Similarly, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns (super PA 3-4 and the like) of other pseudo-series are provided according to the number of executions. Then, these pseudo-continuous variation patterns are set in a predetermined variation pattern type determination table, and a predetermined number of determination values are allocated. When a variation pattern with a large number of pseudo-continuous executions is selected, the variation pattern type determination table or the like is set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher than when a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-unit executions is selected. Determination values are assigned in the variation pattern determination table. This is to increase the expectation of jackpot and increase the interest of the player as the number of executions of the pseudo-ream increases.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S91). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S91; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. 23D is performed based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. According to the setting, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132I is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S92).

  If the big hit flag is off in step S91 (step S261; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S93). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S93; Yes), the table shown in FIG. According to the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S94).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S93 (step S93; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 5, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbols is set to the reach state (step S95). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value (step S96). Subsequently, the random value MR2-2 for reach determination is read (step S97). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR2-2 read in step S97, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S95 (step S95). S98).

  If a reach determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S98 (step S99; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to each determination result with reach state such as the determination results of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S98. As the use table, any one of reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C is selected and set (step S100A). On the other hand, when the reach determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S98 (step S99; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1 in step S98. -1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the use to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to each determination result without reach state As a table, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 27A to 27C is selected and set (step S100B).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S92, S94, S100A, and S2100B, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is read (step S101A). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type read out in step S101A, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S92, S94, S100A, and S100B, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S101B).

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S101B in this way, a usage table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type is shown in FIGS. 28 and 29A. And the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C shown in (B) and the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B shown in FIGS. 30 and 31 are selected and set (step S101C). ). Subsequently, the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is read (step S101D). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern read out in step S101D, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S101C (step S101E). .

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command (see FIG. 13) corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S101E to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Note that the special symbol variation time (variable display time) is determined by the processing in step S101E.

  Then, according to the setting of the special symbol pointer, the special symbol is started to change (step S104). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Note that in the special symbol display control process of step S33 without using the start flag or the end flag, when controlling the variation of the special symbol based only on the value of the special symbol process flag, in step S106, the CPU 56 A flag indicating which variation of the special symbol may be set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs any one of the display control 1 designation to display result 7 designation control commands (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of loss, big hit, small hit, or big hit. ) Is transmitted. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If it is not set, it is checked whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is not set, control is performed to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118). ). When the small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 7 designation command (steps S116 and S117). When the big hit flag is set, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit one of the display results 3 to 5 designation command (steps S111 and S112). That is, when the first probability variable big hit flag is set, the display result 3 designation command is transmitted. When the second probability variation big hit flag is set, the display result 4 designation command is transmitted. When the third probability variation jackpot flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 5 designation command. If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set and the probability variation jackpot flag is not suddenly set, control for transmitting a display result 2 designation command is performed (steps S113 and S114). When the sudden probability big hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 6 designation command is performed (step S115).

  Next, a total reserved memory number subtraction designation command designating that the total reserved memory number is subtracted by 1 is transmitted (step S119). In addition, you may transmit the total pending | holding memory number designation | designated command which designates the total pending | holding memory count after subtraction, without transmitting the total pending | holding memory number subtraction designation | designated command.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S120).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the symbol stop time (the stop time of the special symbol stop symbol; For example, 1 second) is set and started (step S123). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S124). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the variation of the special symbol, and performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the special symbol display unit 8. (Step S131). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the stop time timer (step S132A), and checks whether the value of the stop time timer has become 0 (timed out) (step S132B). When the value of the stop time timer is not 0 (when not timed out), the processing is terminated as it is. When the value of the stop time timer becomes 0, the processing after step S133A is executed. The symbol confirmation designation command is set once when the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted so that the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted only once when the stop symbol is derived and displayed (see step S131). After that, the process of step S131 is not executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133A). If it is set, control for transmitting the jackpot start 2 designation command is performed (step S133B). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (step S133C).

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S133D). If set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (step S134), and performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command (step S135). Specifically, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, a big hit start 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set, a big hit 4 designation command is transmitted, and the probability variation big hit flag and suddenly If the probability variation jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted.

  Also, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the fact that the big hit has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). Note that the jackpot display time is different for the 15-round jackpot and the 2-round jackpot. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S139).

  When the big hit flag is not set (N in Step S133D), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (Step S139A). If it is set, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is changed in the time reduction state (step S139B), and it is confirmed whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0. (Step S139C). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the time reduction flag is reset (step S139D). In this embodiment, the time reduction state is continued until the transition of the special symbol 100 times is completed after the transition to the time reduction state.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S140).

  Note that the processing of steps S133A to S133C may be executed immediately before the processing of step S140. According to such a configuration, the number of time reductions can be accurately counted (subtracted). In other words, in this embodiment, even if the small hit game ends after the small hit occurs, the gaming state is not changed. Therefore, if the gaming state when the small hit is generated is the short-time state, the gaming state after the small hit game is also the short-time state. 36, assuming that the number of fluctuations that can be continued in the short-time state after the end of the small hit game is the remaining number of fluctuations in the short-time state before the small hit occurs, in the configuration shown in FIG. In such a case, the process of subtracting the number of time reductions will not be performed. However, if the processing of steps S133A to S133C is executed immediately before the processing of step S140, the processing for subtracting the number of time reductions is performed in the fluctuation when the small hit occurs, and the time reduction number is accurately determined. Can be subtracted.

  In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 controls to open the big winning opening when the big hit display time timer times out, and sets the big winning opening opening time timer. Set a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hits and probable big hits, and 0.5 seconds for sudden big odds), and the special symbol process flag value is being opened. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the process (step S306). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When the interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is usually set for a big hit and a probable big hit, and 0.5 seconds is set for a sudden probable big hit. The value is updated to a value corresponding to S306).

  In the process during opening of the big prize opening, the CPU 56 does not finish the final round when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, control for closing the special winning opening is performed, a value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305). Update. When the final round (15 rounds or 2 rounds) ends, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S307).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, when the probability variation jackpot flag is set, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation jackpot flag is set suddenly, a jackpot termination 3 designation command is transmitted, and the probability variation jackpot flag and sudden probability variation are transmitted. When the jackpot flag is not set, a jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. It should be noted that the count switch detection time shown in FIG. 38 is a sufficient time for the game ball to be detected by the count switch 23 after winning the big winning opening. For example, if it takes a maximum of 1.0 seconds for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening and be detected by the count switch 23, the count switch detection time is longer than 1.0 seconds.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S156).

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is set, the set flag (probability variation jackpot flag) is reset (step S157), the probability variation flag is set, and the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state (step S158). Next, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S159). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  When the probability variation jackpot flag is not set (N in step S156), it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is suddenly set (step S161). If the sudden probability change jackpot flag is set, the set flag (sudden probability change jackpot flag) is reset (step S162), and the chance mode flag is set to shift to the chance mode state (step S163). The probability change flag is set, and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state (step S158). Next, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S159). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160). Although not shown in FIG. 38, in step S159, it is determined whether the end of 15 rounds of probability change big hit or the end of 2 rounds of sudden probability change big hit, and whether the gaming state is a low base state. It is determined whether the state is a high base state. If the end of two rounds of sudden probability change jackpot is reached and the base state is low, the time reduction flag is not set (the process of step S159 is not executed). By performing such processing, the gaming state after suddenly changing jackpot has ended and the gaming state after finishing jackpot are the same low base state, and whether suddenly suddenly changing jackpot has occurred or whether a small hit has occurred It becomes possible to make it harder to recognize.

  If the sudden probability big hit flag has not been set (N in step S161), the CPU 56 sets a predetermined value (100 in this embodiment) to the hour / count counter (step S164). Also, a time reduction flag is set (step S159). In other words, in this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state is controlled to the short time state until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the variable display is finished. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S160).

  In the pre-opening process for small hits in step S308, the same process as the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) is performed. However, instead of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large winning opening opening process, the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process. Further, in the small hit opening process in step S309, the same process as the big prize opening opening process (step S306) is performed. However, if it is not the final round, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308), and if it is the final round (second round), the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step S310).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S170). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S174. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the small hit flag is reset (step S171). Then, the small hit end display timer sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (small hit end display time) in the small hit end display timer ( Step S173), the process is terminated. It should be noted that the count switch detection time shown in FIG. 39 is a time sufficient for the game ball to be detected by the count switch 23 after winning the winning prize opening.

  In step S174, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S175). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the chance mode flag is set to shift to the chance mode state (step S176). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S177).

  Next, the contents of the notice effect will be described. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each notice effect in the notice type (1). The notice effect shown in FIG. 40 is an effect of notifying the occurrence of a big hit by displaying characters on the background. In addition, the notice effect in the notice type (1) shown in FIG. 40 is one or more before the change of the symbol based on the predetermined reserved memory (start prize) is started when the start prize is generated a plurality of times. This is a notice effect that is executed continuously over one or more variations of the symbol based on the reserved storage. That is, the notices X to Z and M shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D are held for a plurality of subsequent times based on the result of a lottery for whether or not to make a reservation notice (a big win that is executed when a start win occurs). It can also be said to be a notice effect that is continuously executed with the reserved memory number as an upper limit in the variable display of special symbols. As shown in FIG. 40, in the notice effect in the notice type (1), a notice effect X of 15 rounds is notified (probable effect big hit is confirmed when the notice effect appears) and 15 rounds. Notice that a big hit (usually big hit or probable big hit) will occur (it is determined that a big hit will occur when the notice effect appears, but it is unknown whether the big hit is a promiscuous big hit or a normal big hit) It is unclear whether or not a big hit will occur (appears when a big hit occurs or breaks out) and a sudden probable big hit / small hit that informs you that a sudden probable big hit or a small hit will occur A notice effect M is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D, the notice effect X is an effect in which the characters “super lucky !!” are displayed in the upper display area of the display area of the effect symbols 9L to 9R. The notice effect Y is an effect in which the characters “Lucky !!” are displayed in the display area in the upper part of the display area of the effect symbols 9L to 9R. The notice effect Z is an effect in which the characters “Lucky !?” are displayed in the display area above the display area of the effect symbols 9L to 9R. The notice effect M is an effect in which the characters “surprise !?” are displayed in the display area above the display area of the effect symbols 9L to 9R.

  FIG. 41A is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the notice effect in the notice type (2). The notice effect in the notice type (2) shown in FIG. 41A is similar to the notice effect in the notice type (1) shown in FIG. It is a notice effect that is continuously executed over one or a plurality of symbol variations based on one or a plurality of reserved memories before the symbol variation based on (winning) is started, and can be said to be a pending notice. .

  As the notice effects in the notice type (2), four types of continuous notice effects A to D as shown in (a) to (d) of FIG. The continuous notice A shown in (a) of FIG. 41A is a notice effect by displaying characters and the like appearing in the background on the effect display device 9. A continuous notice B shown in (b) of FIG. 41A is a notice effect using the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27. A continuous notice C shown in (c) of FIG. 41A is a notice effect using the effect display device 9 and the lamp. A continuous notice D shown in (d) of FIG. 41A is a notice effect using the effect display device 9, the lamp and the speaker 27.

  FIG. 41B shows the contents of a normal notice effect. As shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41 (A), the normal notice effect is suspended before the start winning is generated based on the result of the lottery to determine whether or not to make a big hit when the start winning occurs. The determination result of the big hit determination (S62, S63, S71 to S82 in FIG. 21) that is not a notice effect that is performed in the variable display of special symbols performed a plurality of times based on the start winning prize, but at the start of variation due to the starting winning prize. Based on this, it is a notice that is executed during the variable display by the occurrence of the start winning whether or not to win a big hit. In this embodiment, the notice A is a step-up notice effect that increases the possibility (reliability) of a big hit by stepping up images such as UFO, and the notice B receives an email. However, this is a mail notice that increases the possibility of winning (reliability) depending on the contents of the received mail. In this embodiment, a notice A that is a step-up notice is a notice type (α), and a notice B that is an e-mail notice is a notice type (β).

  Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the notices shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the 15 round big hits (ordinary big hits or probable big hits) shown in FIGS. 46 and 47 occur as the notices in the notice type (1). A notice effect that informs this (a special effect for the sudden probability change big hit as described later), and a sudden probability change big hit that informs that a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 occurs. There is also a notice effect N for small hits.

  The example of the notice effect shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 is an example, and more types of notice effects may be performed. For example, in the continuous notices B and C, different presentation modes may be realized by changing the sound generation pattern, or in the continuous notices C and D, different presentation modes are realized by changing the blinking pattern of the lamp. May be. Moreover, in continuous notice AD, you may implement | achieve a different production | presentation aspect by changing the kind of character. In addition, even when performing more types of continuous notice effects, which effect means is used to perform the continuous notice and which effect mode is used for the continuous notice is determined by the effect control means. It is determined uniquely based on the reception of the production control command specifying the start winning memory number. In addition, the mode (contents) of the announcement effect uniquely determined by the production control means is a continuous announcement mode as long as it is executed before the variable display of the production symbol having the display result as the jackpot symbol is started. It does not have to be. For example, the frame lamp flash lighting mode illustrated in FIG. 41A may be selected from a plurality of types.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing the display state of the notice effect at the time of big hit / loss in the notice type (1). As shown in FIG. 42, the effect symbols 9L to 9R are varied based on the hold storage (start winning prize) (1-1). At this time, one hold storage 181 that has not yet started changing is displayed in the hold storage display area 18c.
In this example, it is assumed that the stop result during variable display and the stop result of variable display by the hold storage 181 are different. Next, when a new start prize is generated during the change of the production symbols 9R to 9L during the variable display of (1-1), the hold memory 182 is newly displayed in the hold memory display area 18c (1- 2).

  In the jackpot determination based on the pending storage 182 that has not yet started to change (see step S222), if it is determined to be a probable variation jackpot, the variation based on the pending storage before the variation that becomes the probable variation jackpot is started By executing the notice effect X that displays the characters “Super Lucky !!”, it is notified that the occurrence of the probable big hit has been determined (1-3). Thereafter, the symbol “543” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbols 9R to 9L that are variably displayed (1-4). After that, after the variable display by the hold memory 181 is started and the off symbol is stopped and displayed (illustration omitted), the fluctuation that becomes a probable big hit by the hold memory 182 is started, and the probability variable symbol “777” is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation. As a result, the player is notified of the occurrence of a probable big hit (1-5). As described above, the notice effect X is determined in the winning determination based on the predetermined hold memory, and the probability variation jackpot is determined, and during the variation based on the hold memory earlier than the predetermined hold memory according to the probability change jackpot. It is an example of a notice effect performed when it is determined to execute a notice effect.

  Also, in the big hit determination based on the pending storage 182 that has not yet started to change (see step S222), if it has been determined to be a big hit (usually a big hit in the example shown in FIG. 42), a change that becomes a big hit starts. By executing the notice effect Y for displaying the characters “Lucky! Thereafter, the symbol “543” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbols 9R to 9L that are variably displayed (1-7). After that, the variable display by the hold memory 181 is started, and after the off symbol is stopped and displayed (not shown), the fluctuation that becomes a big hit by the hold memory 182 is started, and the probability variable symbol “666” is stopped and displayed in the change. Thus, the player is informed of the occurrence of the big hit (1-8). As described above, the notice effect Y is determined as a big hit of 15 rounds (probability big hit or normal big hit) by the determination at the time of winning based on a predetermined hold memory, and before the predetermined hold memory with this big hit This is an example of a notice effect that is executed when it is determined that a notice effect is to be executed during a change based on the reserved memory.

  Also, in the big hit determination based on the pending storage 182 that has not yet started to change (see step S222), if it has been determined to be out of hit or big hit (in the example shown in FIG. 42, “out”), it is out of place or big hit. By executing the notice effect Z that displays the characters “Lucky !?” during the fluctuation based on the reserved memory before the fluctuation is started, it is notified that there is a possibility of a big hit (1-9) . Thereafter, the symbol “543” is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbols 9R to 9L that are variably displayed (1-10). After that, the variable display by the hold memory 181 is started, and after the outlier symbol is stopped and displayed (not shown), the fluctuation that is missed by the hold memory 182 is started. The player is informed that the situation has been lost (1-11). As described above, the notice effect Z can be executed when either a deviation or a big win is determined in the determination at the time of winning based on the predetermined hold memory, and the change is based on the hold memory before the hold memory. It is an example of a notice effect that is executed when it is determined that a notice effect is to be executed.

  In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of reserved memories at the time when it is decided to execute the notice effects X, Y, Z, M, the same contents are obtained in a plurality of fluctuations based on the plurality of reserved memories. It is assumed that the notice effects X, Y, Z, and M are continuously executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 42, since the number of reserved memories is one when it is determined to execute the notice effect based on the start winning prize, the notice effects X, Y, and Z are executed with only one change. However, if there are two or three reserved memories when it is decided to execute the notice effects X, Y, Z, the notice contents X, Y, Z having the same contents over two or three fluctuations. Is executed. That is, characters such as “super lucky !!” are displayed over a plurality of variations.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control such as winning effect setting processing. In the example shown in FIG. 43, the effect display device 9 changes the effect symbol on the basis of the first start winning (see A), but the change display result is out of order.

  Also, in FIG. 43, “Yes” for the start winning is that a new start winning occurs during the execution of the fluctuation, and it is determined that the big win (ordinary big win or probable big hit) or out of place in the winning effect setting processing. , And the jackpot determination at the time of starting winning is shown as “big hit” and “out of”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a winning judgment jackpot designation command (a prize judgment normal jackpot designation command or a prize judgment probability variation jackpot designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (see steps S229 and S230). The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a notice effect (showing the notice effect Y shown in FIG. 40 as an example) based on the reception of the winning determination jackpot designation command, and the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command. This indicates that the prohibition flag is set (ON) (see step S231) (see B).

  Furthermore, a start win has occurred, and it has been determined that a big hit (ordinary big hit or a probable big hit) has been set in the winning effect setting process, but since the command transmission prohibition flag is set, the winning determination big hit designation command has not been transmitted ( Steps S223 and 224) (see C). Furthermore, a start winning has occurred and it has been determined that the winning effect setting process has failed, but since the command transmission prohibition flag has been set, the winning determination has not been transmitted (see steps S223 and 224). Is shown (see D).

  Then, it is shown that the game control microcomputer 560 resets (OFF) the command transmission prohibition flag when the big hit game is started (see step S151B) (see E). After that, a start win occurs, and it is determined that a big hit (ordinary big hit or a probable big hit) is set in the effect setting process at the time of winning, and the command transmission prohibition flag is not set. (See F).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts from a predetermined notice effect (for example, the notice effect Y) until the jackpot gaming state starts. Since it is configured to prohibit the execution of a predetermined notice effect, that is, a predetermined effect is performed when a start winning with a display result of variable display as a big hit symbol occurs, and then predetermined until a big hit occurs The player is not able to execute the production, and the player can easily grasp when the big hit corresponds to the starting prize.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display state when a winning effect setting process or the like is executed. As shown in FIG. 44, when the big hit determination (step S222) based on the start winning (holding storage) is determined to be a big win (probable big hit in the example shown in FIG. 44), the winning big hit designation command is for effect control The data is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 (step S228), and a command transmission prohibition flag is set (step S231).

  When the fluctuation of the effect symbols 9L to 9R is started (2-1), the big hit symbol ("777") is stopped and displayed as the big symbol (2-2) as the stop symbol in the fluctuation, and the big hit game is started ( 2-3) The command transmission prohibition flag is reset (step S401). Thereby, prohibition of execution of the notice effect is canceled. At this time, one hold storage 181 that has not yet started changing is displayed in the hold storage display area 18c. In this example, it is assumed that a symbol is displayed as a variable display stop display based on the hold storage 181.

  Thereafter, during the big hit game (for example, the second round), a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 13 and a start win is generated (2-4, 2-5), and a new hold is held in the hold storage display area 18c. Memory 182 is displayed. If it is determined that a big hit (for example, a promising big hit) is determined in the big hit determination (step S222) in the winning effect setting process at the time when the start winning is generated, “Super Lucky! ”Is displayed to notify that a probable big hit will occur (2-6).

  After the big hit game is finished, the fluctuation start based on the hold memory 181 is started, and after the stop display (not shown), the fluctuation that becomes a big hit based on the hold memory 182 is started (2-7, 2-8). In the fluctuation, the big hit symbol (“777”) is stopped and displayed as a big hit.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing a display state of the special effect for sudden probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, when two rounds of sudden odd-change jackpots occur, a special performance different from the 15-round jackpot is executed during the fluctuation and jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 45, when the big hit determination (see step S62) is determined to be suddenly probable big hit, the fluctuation that becomes the sudden probable big hit is started (3-1). Stop symbols ("135") are stopped and displayed in the order of symbol 9R and middle symbol 9C (3-2 to 3-4). Here, the stop symbol (“135”) does not stop completely but fluctuates (3-4). Next, a special effect for sudden probability variation big hit in which a girl character appears is executed (3-5) to (3-6). In this embodiment, the effect of the introduction part of the special effect for sudden probability variation big hit as shown in (3-5) (in the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect that the girl character with the sword appears on the screen) This is called an introduction effect (introduction effect mode). The introductory effect has a role of notifying the player of the sudden occurrence of a probable big hit. Even when the introduction effect is being executed, the fluctuation of the stop symbol ("135") is performed (3-5). Thereafter, the fluctuation of the swing is stopped and the stop symbol “135” is stopped and displayed, and the characters “LIVE mode rush!” Are displayed to notify the player that the state will change to the certain change state (3-6). In this embodiment, the effect of the portion that suggests shifting to the probability change state of the special effect for sudden probability change big hit as shown in (3-6) (in the example shown in FIG. 45, “LIVE mode has entered! The effect of displaying the characters “)” is referred to as the suggestion effect (the suggestion effect mode). Then, the jackpot game is executed for a short period (only 2 rounds) (3-7). At this time, a girl character and a “Live mode” character are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. The “Live mode” is a special effect mode when the state is suddenly changed to a probability variation state based on the occurrence of a probability variation big hit. After the big hit game is over, the effect symbols 9L to 9R in the LIVE mode are changed (3-8).

  In this embodiment, even when a small hit occurs, a special effect for probability variation big hit is suddenly executed, and after the small hit game, a transition is made to a fake LIVE mode (the same display mode effect mode as the LIVE mode). With this configuration, the player suddenly becomes unable to recognize whether a probable big hit or a small win has occurred (it is difficult to recognize), and is interested in whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the probable state. Can be made.

  46 and 47 are explanatory diagrams showing the display state of the notice effect A having the same content as the special effect for sudden probability variation big hit. As shown in FIG. 46, in the big hit determination (see step S62), a variation that causes a shift is performed (4-1). At this time, two hold memories 181 and 182 that have not yet started to change are displayed in the hold memory display area 18c. In this example, the stop result during variable display is different from the stop result of variable display by the hold memories 181 and 182. Next, during this change, a start win occurs, and a new reserved memory 183 is displayed in the reserved memory display area 18c (the number of reserved memories becomes 3) (4-2). In the winning effect setting process based on the start winning (holding storage 183), it is assumed that 15 rounds are determined to be a big hit. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined period, the stop symbol (outlier symbol “389”) is stopped and displayed (4-3). Here, the stop symbol (“389”) is completely stopped and no fluctuation is performed. Subsequently, the fluctuation | variation used as the deviation based on the holding | maintenance memory | storage 181 is started (4-4). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, an effect having the same content as the special effect for sudden probability variation big hit (FIG. 45) in which the girl character appears is executed as the notice effect (4-5). In FIG. 46 (4-5), the same effect as the introduction effect shown in FIG. 45 (3-5) is executed. By executing such an effect, the player expects that a probabilistic jackpot has suddenly occurred. After that, the stop symbol (outlier symbol “745”) is stopped and displayed, and a suggestive effect is displayed to display the characters “LIVE mode rush!”. Show the player to move to (4-6). At this time, the stop symbol (“745”) is completely stopped and no fluctuation is performed. Then, the same contents as when the two round jackpot game is being executed (girl character and “LIVE mode” character) are executed, and it appears as if it has shifted to the LIVE mode (4-7) . Thereafter, the same effects (background, symbols, etc.) as in the LIVE mode are performed in order to make it appear as if the effects of the effects 9L to 9R are changed in the LIVE mode (4-8). After that, a variation that becomes a deviation based on the hold storage 182 is started (4-8), and the loss symbol (“682”) is stopped and displayed (4-9), and then 15 rounds based on the hold storage 183 are performed. A big hit is started (4-10). Then, the big hit symbol (probability variation symbol “777”) is stopped and displayed in the change, and the player is notified that a big hit of 15 rounds will occur (4-11).

  As described above, the notice effects shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 suddenly execute the notice effect of the same content as the special effect for the probable big hit, and the background, design, etc. are changed as if the subsequent change was made to the LIVE mode. By displaying, it is possible to make it appear that a 15-round jackpot has occurred after a sudden odd-change jackpot has suddenly occurred to the player, although only a 15-round jackpot has actually occurred. As a result, it is possible to improve the joy of the player rather than generating the big hit of 15 rounds as usual, by generating the big hit of 15 rounds with many outgoing balls after the big round of big hits of 2 rounds occurs. Can do. In addition, by executing a special effect for suddenly probable big hit or a notice effect with the same content as that special effect, the player can expect not only a sudden probable big hit but also a big round of 15 rounds. , Can improve the interest. In addition, since the appearance chance of the notice effect can be increased, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the big hit by the appearance of the notice effect for the player.

  48 and 49 are explanatory diagrams showing the display state of the notice effect N for sudden probability variation big hit. As shown in FIG. 48, in the big hit determination (see step S62), a variation that causes a shift is performed (5-1). At this time, two hold memories 181 and 182 that have not yet started to change are displayed in the hold memory display area 18c. In this example, the stop result during variable display is different from the stop result of variable display by the hold memories 181 and 182. Next, during this change, the start winning is generated twice, the new reserved memories 183 and 184 are displayed in the reserved memory display area 18c, and the number of reserved memories becomes 4 (5-2). Assume that in the winning effect setting process based on the first start winning (the third hold storage 183), it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit of two rounds. In addition, it is assumed that in the winning effect setting process based on the second start winning (fourth hold memory 184), it is determined that the game is lost. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined period, the stop symbol (outlier symbol “389”) is stopped and displayed (5-3). Here, the stop symbol (“389”) is completely stopped and no fluctuation is performed. Next, a change that becomes out of place based on the hold memory 181 is started, and the notice effect for the sudden probability variation big hit in which the girl character appears (the notice effect of the content different from the special effect for the sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 45: suddenly A promising big hit / small hit notice effect N) is executed (5-4). Here, the sudden announcement effect N for sudden probability change big hit / small hit is an effect equivalent to the introduction effect of the special effects for sudden probability change shown in FIG. 45 (effect in which a girl with a sword appears). By executing such an effect, the player expects sudden occurrence of a probable big hit. After that, the stop symbol (outlier symbol “745”) is stopped and displayed (5-5). At this time, an effect corresponding to the introductory effect in which the girl character appears (notice effect N for a sudden probability variation big hit) is continuously executed. In addition, the stop symbol (“745”) is completely stopped and no fluctuation is made.

  Then, the change based on the next hold memory 182 is started (5-6), and the effect corresponding to the introduction effect (suddenly promising big hit / small hit notice effect N) is continuously executed. Yes. After that, the stop symbol (outlier symbol “682”) is stopped and displayed (5-7). Also at this time, the production corresponding to the introduction production is continuously executed. Furthermore, the change based on the next hold storage 183 is started (5-8), and at this time, the effect corresponding to the introduction effect is continuously executed. Thereafter, the stop symbol (suddenly probable symbol “135”) is stopped and displayed (5-9). Then, the characters “LIVE mode rush!” Are displayed to notify the player that a sudden probability change big hit has occurred and the state will change to the probability change state (5-10). The effect of displaying the characters “LIVE mode entry!” Is an effect equivalent to the suggestion effect of the special effect for sudden probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 45 (3-6). Then, the jackpot game is executed for a short period (only 2 rounds) (5-11). After the big hit game ends, the effect symbols 9L to 9R in the LIVE mode are changed (5-12).

  As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, a series of effects are continuously produced over one or a plurality of fluctuations before the fluctuation that becomes a sudden probability variation big hit and the fluctuation that becomes a sudden probability variation big hit. Execute. By executing such an effect, it is possible to execute an effect (an effect having the same role as the special effect for the sudden probability change big hit) that informs that a sudden probability change big hit will occur over a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation and improve the interest of the player. In addition, since the appearance chance of the notice effect can be increased, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the big hit by the appearance of the notice effect for the player.

  In this embodiment, even when a small hit occurs, the notice effect N for sudden probability big hit / small hit is executed suddenly. As a result, depending on the content of the notice effect, the player can no longer recognize whether it is suddenly a chance hit or a jackpot has occurred (it is difficult to recognize), and is interested in whether the subsequent game state is a probability change state. be able to.

  Next, the display state at the time of shifting to the time-short state or the latent probability changing state will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a display state when shifting to the short-time state or the latent probability changing state. As shown in FIG. 50, when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination (step S62), and it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) in the determination of the big hit type (step S73), the effect symbol of the effect display device 9 In the display area, the left and right effect symbols are aligned with the non-probable variable symbol (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 50), and reach (A). As a result, a big hit occurs (B). At this time, the special symbol display 8 derives and displays the uncertain variable symbol “3” (B). Then, the big hit game is started and each round proceeds in order (C). When the big hit game ends, for example, by displaying a character “rushing into the time-saving mode” on the effect display device 9, the player is notified that the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state (D). Then, the change of the effect symbol and the special symbol is started again (E). At this time, if the background color indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is “blue” and the background color indicating that the gaming state is the short-time state is “yellow”, the effect symbol display of the effect display device 9 The background color in the area is changed from “blue” to “yellow”. When the character image is displayed as the background image, the character image in the normal state is changed to the character image in the time-short state.

  In addition, unless it is determined that a big hit is determined in the big hit determination (step S62) and is determined to be a promising big hit in the determination of the big hit type (step S73), except for the case where the promotion effect during the big hit game is executed, In the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9, the probability variation symbol is derived and displayed. However, in this embodiment, the game state is not notified to the player that the probability variation big hit is generated even though the probability variation big hit is determined at a predetermined ratio, and the game state is maintained even after the big hit game ends. A transition is made to a latent probability changing state in which the player is not notified that the probability changing state has been entered. In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, in the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9, the left and right effect symbols are aligned with the non-probable variable symbol (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 50), and reach (A), and then A big hit is generated when the left, middle, and right production symbols are all derived and displayed with non-probable variation symbols (B). At this time, on the special symbol display 8, the probability variation symbol "7" is derived and displayed (B). Then, the big hit game is started and each round proceeds in order (C). When the big hit game ends, for example, by displaying a character “rushing into the time-saving mode” on the effect display device 9, the player is notified that the gaming state shifts to the time-saving state (D). Then, the change of the effect symbol and the special symbol is started again (E). At this time, the background color in the effect symbol display area of the effect display device 9 is changed from “blue” to “yellow” in order to conceal that the gaming state has been changed to the probability change state. If a character image is displayed as the background image, the character image is changed to the time-short state.

  When the probable big hit occurs, the special symbol display 8 derives and displays the probable symbol “7”, but the player pays more attention to the effect display device 9 than the special symbol display 8. It ’s unlikely that they ’ve been moved to a probable state. In addition, when there is a concern that the occurrence of a probable big hit will be realized by displaying “7” on the special symbol display 8, a display mode in which the player is not likely to recognize the display of the probable variation on the special symbol display 8. (For example, lighting of a lamp at a predetermined position) may be changed.

  In addition, in order to make it impossible to identify whether the gaming state has shifted to the time-saving state or the probability-changing state after the big hit, the background color or the background image is set to the time-saving state as an effect mode (display mode) that can identify the gaming state. However, it is also common for other effects that can identify the gaming state. For example, if the lamp / LED lighting pattern during variable display, the type of sound effect, the effect during variable display (for example, moving image data during reach), the reach mode, the characters that appear, etc. differ depending on the gaming state As for the various production modes, the case where the state is shifted to the short time state and the case where the state is shifted to the latent probability changing state are made common in appearance. In the present invention, the above-described effect mode that is common in appearance when the state is shifted to the short-time state and when the state is shifted to the latent probability changing state is referred to as “common effect”. Note that, for example, if the effect during variable display (for example, moving image data at the time of reach), the reach mode, and the like do not differ depending on the gaming state, such a mode of effect is also included in the “common effect”.

  Further, as a condition for shifting to the latent probability changing state, for example, when “first probability variation” or “second probability variation” is determined as the big hit type, transition to the latent probability varying state is performed at a ratio of 1/2 (FIG. 85). (See step S513A). Further, when “third probability variation” is determined as the big hit type, the state is shifted to the latent probability variation state at a rate of 1/3. It should be noted that the ratio is not limited to this, and can be set to an arbitrary ratio in accordance with game control.

  In this way, even when a probability variation big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the probability variation state, the game is configured to shift to the latent probability variation state at a predetermined rate. Even if the state is shifted to the state, there is a possibility that the player has been shifted to the probability change state, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that the player may have shifted to the probability change state.

  Next, the random numbers updated by the production control microcomputer 100 (production control CPU 101) will be described.

  On the effect control board 80, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation are counted in an updatable manner. FIG. 51 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 51, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 80, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution Random number SR5, random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns, random value SR7-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern type, and for determining the second sub-notice pattern type Random value SR7-2, Random value SR8-1 for determining the first sub notice pattern, Random value SR8-2 for determining the second sub notice pattern, Random value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern, Notification effect execution decision Random value SR10-1, notification Numerical data indicating the respective random value SR10-2 for turn determination is countable controlled. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The production control CPU 101 uses these random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5, SR6-1 to SR6-3, SR7-1, SR7-2, SR8-. 1, SR8-2, SR9, SR10-1, SR10-2 may be any one that counts numerical data indicating all or part of it.

  Random values SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 9 as finalized effect symbols that are variable display results of the effect symbols. ”Is a random value used to determine the effect symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each symbol display area. Here, the final stop symbols are three effect symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when the variable display of the effect symbols ends. That is. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol during the promotion effect is a normal jackpot combination for temporarily stopping display in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas when executing the changing promotion effect. Is a random number value used to determine the effect design, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is “left”, “middle”, This is a random value used for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the “right” effect symbol display area, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “101”.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when executing a specific effect of “pseudo-continuous”. This is a random number value used to determine the combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each effect symbol display area as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  The random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is the promotion effect during change when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. Or a random number value used to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random numbers SR6-1 to SR6-3 for determining the first to third specific effect patterns correspond to the contents of the effect operation when executing the specific effects such as “slip”, “pseudo train”, and “main notice”. It is a random value used to determine the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types. As an example, the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “slip” specific effect, and is in the range of “1” to “71”. Takes a value. The random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern in the case of executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, and values in the range of “1” to “150” are used. Take. The random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, and values in the range of “1” to “60” are used. Take.

  The random number SR7-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the sub-notice effect that is the continuous notice, and prepares the first sub-notice pattern type when the sub-notice effect is executed in advance. This is a random value used for determining one of the plurality of types (notice type (1) or notice type (2)), and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random number SR7-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern type determines whether or not to execute the sub-notice effect that is a normal notice other than the continuous notice, and the second sub-notice pattern when the sub-notice effect is executed. This is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types prepared in advance (notice type (α) or notice type (β)) and takes a value in the range of “1” to “191”. The random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern includes sub-notice patterns (effect patterns of notice effects: for example, notice effects X, Y, and Z shown in FIG. 40, continuous notice effects A to A shown in FIG. D, a plurality of types prepared in advance of a notice effect having the same contents as the special effect for sudden probability change big hit shown in FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 and the effect pattern of the notice effect for sudden probability change big hit shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. It is a random value used to determine any of the following. The random number SR8-1 for determining the first sub-notice pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”. The random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern is any of a plurality of types prepared in advance as sub-notice patterns (effect patterns of notice effects: for example, effect patterns of the notice effects A and B shown in FIG. 41). A random value used to determine The random number SR8-2 for determining the second sub-notice pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”.

  The random value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is one of a plurality of types of reach effect patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state. Random number values used to determine the value of, and take values in the range of “1” to “80”.

  The random value SR10-1 for determining the notification effect execution is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the notification effect, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “99”. The random number SR10-2 for determining the notification pattern is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types of notification patterns prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of “0” to “99”.

  The ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 101 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop shown in FIGS. 52 (A) to (D) is used as a table for determining a definite production symbol that is one of the predetermined non-reach combinations and the development chances HC1 to HC8. Symbol determination tables 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 52A is a left final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 52B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes a random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 52C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area among the predetermined effect symbols that are the predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like.

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 53. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1- 3 is made up of determination data assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that are the middle final stop symbols FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 52 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the combination of the finalized design is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the chances of success TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. In addition, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 52C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the part that becomes the combination of. For example, even if it is other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 2A, the portion that becomes the development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in FIG. The random final value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is set in the portion that becomes the odd chance TC1 to TC4 shown in 2 (C), and further in the portion that becomes a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG. Not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, an expansion chance HC1 to HC8, or a random chance TC1. ˜TC4, and even certain non-reach combinations similar to these chances.

  The final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 52 (D) shows the final display in each of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the specific effect “end of development chance” is executed. Based on the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol, the combination of the definitive effect symbols that become the stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ1-5, and FZ1-6 is determined as one of the development chances HC1 to HC8. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 160D is composed of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the development chance items HC1 to HC8.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B shown in FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B) as tables for determining a definite effect symbol to be a reach-losing combination. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 55 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area among the finalized effect symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area, are determined based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. This is a table to be referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A has a rendering symbol (left and right final stop symbol FZ2) in which the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1 is the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. −1, FZ2-2), the data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 55 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area among the finalized effect symbols that are reach-losing combinations. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  Here, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The In other words, in the variable display of effect symbols, the effect symbols start to change in the effect symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized design symbol that is the variable display result of the production symbol is stopped, the “left” and “right” production symbol display areas other than the “medium” production symbol display area where the production symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to stop in the “medium” effect symbol display area. The difference (design difference) between the displayed middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a definite effect symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or one of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-1 to PB3-5, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- The random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is changed to symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, depending on the case of any one of the fluctuation patterns of 5 to super PA3-8. It consists of data for determination to be assigned to “+2”.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 56A to 56C is used as a table for determining a definite effect symbol to be one of the big hit combinations and the chances of success TC1 to TC4. 163A to 163C are included. The final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 56 (A) is a left middle that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as a confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “of the normal symbol that is the same as the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3. It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 56 (B) is a left middle that is stopped and displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as a confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination. It is a table referred to for determining the right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is the same as the symbol number “ It is composed of data for determination to be assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 56 (C) has a left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-2, FZ4- in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. 3 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the combination of the determined effect symbols of 3 as one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163C is made up of determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the odd chance items TC1 to TC4.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, specific effect pattern determination tables 164A and 164B shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B as tables for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. Yes. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 57A slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of -1 to slip TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Super PF1-3, Special PG1-2, Special A random value SR6- for determining the first specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which a specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as a change pattern of PG2-2 and special PG3-3. 1 is composed of data for determination assigned to the specific production patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4. .

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after the effect symbols are changed in all of the effect symbol display areas “left”, “middle”, and “right”, the “left” and “right” effects are produced. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display area, the effect symbol is displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area by rapidly changing the effect symbol again in the “right” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a high speed, and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the “Left” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “RIGHT” is re-varied to a low speed and then stopped and displayed in the “RIGHT” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas are displayed. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at, the effect symbol display area of “Left” is re-fluctuated at a low speed, and then the effect is stopped and displayed in the “Left” effect symbol display area. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. 57 (B) is specified based on the random number SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous (chance)” is executed. It is a table referred to in order to determine the production pattern as one of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B includes non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PB3-4, super PA4-4, super PA4-8, super PB4-4, super PB5-4, super A random value SR6 for determining the second specific effect pattern according to a change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, such as a change pattern of PF1-1 and special PG1-3. -2 is made up of data for determination assigned to the specific effect patterns of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 to the pseudo-continuous TP2-3.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas, and then re-variation (pseudo-variation). The all-revariation display operation to be performed is performed once before the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2, the total re-variation display operation is performed twice before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. In the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the all-revariable display operation is performed three times before the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the specific performance pattern is determined as one of the pseudo-series TP2-1 to the pseudo-series TP2-3 by using the specific performance pattern determination table 164B, thereby determining the number of times of execution of the pseudo-series variation. be able to.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM includes a specific effect pattern determination table for selecting and determining a specific effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice”. Yes. As an example of a table for determining a specific effect pattern when a specific effect of “main notice” is executed, specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E as shown in FIGS. As long as it is stored. The specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E shown in FIGS. 58A to 58C are based on the random number value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed. , Specific notice patterns are main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, main notice TP3-2-2, main notice TP3-3-1, main notice TP3-3. -2 is a table that is referred to in order to select and decide from -2. Each of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E is used as a use table according to the value of the main notice table designation buffer (main notice table designation buffer value) according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Specified and set. The specific performance pattern determination tables 164C to 164E are respectively non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4- 3. Random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as the change pattern of the super PB 5-3. Main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, main notice TP3-2-2, main notice TP3-3-1, main notice TP3-3-2 It consists of data for selection assigned to a specific performance pattern. Each of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E has a main notice table designation buffer value corresponding to the specific effect pattern determined based on the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern. Table data (update data) indicating the main notice table designation buffer update setting value for updating to any one of “1” to “3” is included.

  Here, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C shown in FIG. 58A is specified and set as a use table when the main notice table designation buffer value is “1”, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6. In this case, the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is selected so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-3-1. Data for selection to assign is set. On the other hand, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164C, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 cannot be selected and determined. When the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-2-1, the next notice of the “main notice” is executed by updating the main notice table designation buffer value to “2”. At the time of selecting the specific effect pattern for the purpose, the specific effect pattern determination table 164D is specified and set as the use table. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-3-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “3”, thereby specifying the next “main notice”. When selecting a specific effect pattern for executing an effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164E is specified and set as a use table.

  The specific effect pattern determination table 164D shown in FIG. 58B is specified and selected as a use table when the main notice table designation buffer value is “2”, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6. The selection of assigning the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-3-1. Data is set. On the other hand, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164D, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-2-1 cannot be selected and determined. When the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-1-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “1”, thereby executing the next effect of “main notice”. At the time of selecting a specific effect pattern to be performed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C is specified and set as a use table. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-3-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “3”, thereby specifying the next “main notice”. When selecting a specific effect pattern for executing an effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164E is specified and set as a use table.

  58. The specific effect pattern determination table 164E shown in FIG. 58C is specified and set as a use table when the main notice table designation buffer value is “3”, and the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6. The selection of assigning the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-2-1. Data is set. On the other hand, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164E, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3-1 cannot be selected and determined. When the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-1-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “1”, thereby executing the next effect of “main notice”. At the time of selecting a specific effect pattern to be performed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164C is specified and set as a use table. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is determined to be the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice table designation buffer value is updated to “2”, thereby specifying the next “main notice”. When selecting a specific effect pattern for executing an effect, the specific effect pattern determination table 164D is specified and set as a use table.

  Thus, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, if the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 is selected using any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164D and 164E, the main notice use When the table designation buffer value is updated to “1” and the specific effect pattern for executing the next “main notice” specific effect is selected, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3 selected this time is selected. The specific effect pattern determination table 164C in which the table data is configured so that the specific effect pattern of 1-1 cannot be selected is specified and set as the use table. If the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-2-1 is selected using any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C and 164E when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice table When the specified buffer value is updated to “2” and the specific effect pattern for executing the specific effect of the next “main notice” is selected, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3 selected this time is selected. The specific effect pattern determination table 164D in which the table data is configured so that the 2-1 specific effect pattern cannot be selected is specified and set as the use table. Further, when the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3-1 is selected using any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C and 164D when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice table When the specified buffer value is updated to “3” and the specific effect pattern for executing the next specific effect of “main notice” is selected, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3 selected this time is selected. The specific effect pattern determination table 164E in which the table data is configured so that the 3-1 specific effect pattern cannot be selected is specified and set as the use table. As described above, the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E each include selection data set so as not to select the specific effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” to be executed this time. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, in the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PA3-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2. When the variation pattern is Super PA3-7, the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main announcement TP3-2-1 and the main announcement TP3-2-2, and the variation pattern is super PB3- 3, a random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is selected so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2. Data for selection to assign is set. Here, the variation patterns of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, and Super PB3-3 are all corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “lost”. As shown in FIG. 9, the reach effect α1 is executed if the change pattern is super PA3-3, and the reach effect α2 is executed if the change pattern is super PA3-7. If it is a variation pattern of the super PB3-3, the reach effect β1 is executed.

  According to such settings of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variable display result is “losing”, the change pattern is a change pattern of the super PA 3-3 for executing the reach effect α1. The specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2, and the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected from the effect operations associated with the reach effect α1. Will be. In addition, when the variable display result is “losing”, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of the super PA 3-7 for executing the reach effect α2, the specific effect pattern is the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice. The effect operation in the specific effect of “main notice” is selected from the effect operations selected from TP3-2-2 and associated with the reach effect α2. Furthermore, when the variable display result is “losing”, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern of the super PB 3-3 for executing the reach effect β1, the specific effect pattern is the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice. The effect operation in the specific effect “main notice” is selected from the effect operations selected from TP3-3-2 and associated with the reach effect β1.

  Further, in the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2. Although the ratio to be determined is high, it is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice TP3-2-2, the main notice TP3-3-1, and the main notice TP3-3-2. For this purpose, selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set. In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-7 or Super PA 5-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2. Although it is selected and determined at a high rate, it is also selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-3-1, and main notice TP3-3-2. Selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so that it can be determined. In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is Super PB4-3 or Super PB5-3, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2. Although it is selected and determined at a high rate, it is also selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-2-2. Determination data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so that it can be determined.

  Here, all of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, and Super PB5-3 are prepared corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. Variation pattern. Then, as shown in FIG. 10, if the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3, the reach effect α1 is executed, and if the variation pattern of the super PA 4-7, the reach effect α2 is executed, and the variation pattern of the super PA 5-3. If this is the case, the reach effect α3 is executed, if the change pattern is the super PB4-3, the reach effect β1 is executed, and if the change pattern is the super PB5-3, the reach effect β2 is executed.

  According to such settings of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the change pattern is the change pattern of the super PA 4-3 for executing the reach effect α1. When the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1-2, the effect in the specific effect of the “main notice” from among the effect operations associated with the reach effect α1. While the action is selected, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice TP3-2-2, the main notice TP3-3-1, and the main notice TP3-3-2. There is also an effect that can be selected for the specific effect of the “main notice” from the effects that are not associated with the reach effect α1. . Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern may be a variation pattern of the super PA 4-7 for executing the reach effect α2 or a variation pattern of the super PA 5-3 for executing the reach effect α3. For example, when the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2, the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected from among the action operations associated with the reach effect α2. While the effect operation is selected, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-3-1, and main notice TP3-3-2. In other cases, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of the “main notice” from among the effect operations not associated with the reach effect α2.Here, by configuring the reach effect α3 to include the effect operation in the reach effect α2, the effect operation associated with the reach effect α2 becomes the effect operation associated with the reach effect α3. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern may be the variation pattern of the super PB 4-3 for executing the reach effect β1 or the variation pattern of the super PB 5-3 for executing the reach effect β2. For example, when the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2, the specific action of the “main notice” is selected from among the action operations associated with the reach effect β1. While the effect operation is selected, the specific effect pattern is selected from the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-2-2. In other cases, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of the “main notice” from among the effect operations not associated with the reach effect β1. . Here, by configuring the reach effect β2 to include the effect operation in the reach effect β1, the effect operation associated with the reach effect β1 becomes the effect operation associated with the reach effect β2.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” by the setting of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, the reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern. It is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of “main notice” from a plurality of types including effect operations not associated with each. However, the production operations associated with each of the reach production α1 to reach production α3 and the reach production β1 to reach production β3 according to the variation pattern are “main notice” compared to the production operations that are not associated with each other. The ratio selected as the rendering operation in the specific rendering becomes high.

  In the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice are included in the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2. Compared to the specific effect patterns of TP3-2-1 and main notice TP3-3-1, the variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” rather than the variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing” However, more random number values SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern are assigned. As an example, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2 includes a range of “41” to “60” corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA3-3 used when the variable display result is “lost”. Is assigned, while a value in the range of “21” to “50” is assigned corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA 4-3 used when the variable display result is “big hit”. . On the other hand, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 is assigned a value in the range of “1” to “40” corresponding to the variation pattern of the super PA3-3, Values “1” to “20” are assigned corresponding to the variation pattern of PA4-3. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1 may be selected, while the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2 is selected. It will never be done. By such setting of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, effect operations corresponding to the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 are performed. In this case, a variable display result is obtained as compared with a case where an effect operation corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-3-1 is performed. The possibility of a “hit” (big hit reliability) increases.

  In any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 The selection data is set so that the specific production pattern is not selected. By such setting of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E, effect operations corresponding to the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 are performed. In this case, the player can recognize that the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state.

  As another example of the table for determining the specific effect pattern when the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, a specific effect pattern determination table 164F as shown in FIG. 59 may be stored in the ROM. The specific performance pattern determination table 164F shown in FIG. 59 includes non-reach PA1-6, super PA3-3, super PA3-7, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-7, super PA5-3, super PB4. −3, the random value SR6- for determining the third specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 9 and 10) in which the specific effect of “main notice” is executed, such as the change pattern of the super PB 5-3. 3, main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-1-2, main notice TP3-2-1, main notice TP3-2-2, main notice TP3-3-1, main notice TP3-3-2 Data for selection to be assigned to the specific production pattern.

  Here, in the specific effect pattern determination table 164F shown in FIG. 59, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, the specific effect pattern is the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice. Selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so as to be selected and determined from TP3-3-1. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern is one of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-7, Super PB3-3, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-7, Super PA5-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3. In the case of, selection data for assigning a random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is set so that the specific effect pattern is selected and determined in the same manner as the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E. Has been. As a result, when the variable display result is “losing”, the “main notice” is selected from the production operations associated with the reach production α1, the reach production α2, and the reach production β1 that are executed according to the variation pattern. The production operation in the specific production is selected. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, a plurality of effect operations that are not associated with each of reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern. From the types, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of “main notice”.

  According to the settings of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E or the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, one of a plurality of types of reach effects such as reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 is executed. In this case, it is possible to select an effect operation in a specific effect of “main notice” from a plurality of types at a different rate depending on the type of reach effect.

  Also in the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3 are included in the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2. 2-1 Compared with the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-3-1, the variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit” than the variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing” However, more random number values SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern are assigned. In the case where an effect operation corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 is performed by the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164F. In this case, the big hit reliability is higher than that in the case where the production operation corresponding to the specific production pattern of the main announcement TP3-1-1, the main announcement TP3-2-1, and the main announcement TP3-3-1 is performed. . In the specific effect pattern determination table 164F, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2. The selection data is set so that is not selected. In the case where an effect operation corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the main notice TP3-1-2, the main notice TP3-2-2, and the main notice TP3-3-2 is performed by the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164F. In this case, the player can recognize that the variable display state of the effect symbol is the reach state.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes a fluctuating promotion effect execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 60A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B shown in FIG. 60B. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A shown in FIG. 60A, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). Is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. In the changing promotion execution execution determination table 165A, the random number SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is changing depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “first probability variation” to “third probability variation”. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion effect. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal” or “third probability variation”, among the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution, the value in the range of “1” to “99” has the promotion effect during the change. The value of “100” is assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion failure effect is executed. When the jackpot type is “first probability variation”, among the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution, the value in the range of “1” to “70” is assigned to the determination result with the changing promotion effect. The value in the range of “71” to “100” is assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change. In this case, if the determination result is that there is a changing promotion effect, the changing promotion success effect is executed. Further, when the jackpot type is “second probability variation”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the promotion effect during the change, and the promotion success during the change and the change promotion during the change Any failure production will not be executed.

  In the big hit middle promotion effect execution decision table 165B shown in FIG. 60 (B), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, “first probability variation” to “third probability variation” (other than “surprise accuracy”). In this case, it is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect based on the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution. The jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 165B determines whether the jackpot type is “normal”, “first probability change” to “third probability change”, and determines the promotion effect execution determination random value SR5 as a jackpot. It consists of decision data assigned to a decision result indicating the presence or absence of a promotion success production or a big hit promotion promotion production. Here, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result with the jackpot promotion promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion promotion effect is executed. It will be. When the jackpot type is “first probability change” or “second probability change”, the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is all assigned to the determination result without the jackpot promotion effect, and the jackpot promotion Both the successful performance and the jackpot promotion failure production will not be executed. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is “third probability variation”, a part of the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned to the determination result of the jackpot promotion promotion success effect, and the rest has the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect. Assigned to the decision result. In this case, depending on the determination result, either the jackpot promotion promotion success effect or the jackpot promotion promotion failure effect is executed.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary stop symbols shown in FIGS. 61 (A) to (D) are used as tables for determining the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect of “slip” is executed. Decision tables 166A to 166D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4, for example, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Selected as. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D has a temporary slip / development chance temporary according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the effect symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. The random number value SR3 for determining the stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped. In other words, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1. Data for determination to be assigned to. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is a symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In response to “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C shows the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3. Contains decision data to allocate. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” effect symbol display area in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of the slip / development chance is changed to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4. Contains decision data to allocate.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, temporary tables shown in FIGS. 62 (A) to 62 (D) are used as tables for determining the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are included. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D indicate that when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed, the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-4, super PA3-8, super PA4- 4. Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3 Is selected as a use table in accordance with the remaining number of re-variable display operations to be executed until the operation is performed. Here, the remaining number of re-variation display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, and the temporary stop symbol one time before that Becomes “1” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the stop display is displayed (pseudo continuous variation), and becomes “2” in the variation of the effect symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is displayed twice before (pseudo continuous variation). By the time of execution of the pseudo continuous variation in which the finalized design symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the variation of the production symbol in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed (pseudo continuous variation) is “3”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the fluctuation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the temporary stop display in the “right” effect symbol display area The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area, are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. When the remaining number of all re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being one of the special PG1 to 3, is “1”. Left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and right temporary stop symbol KZ2-, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. 2. It is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA 3-4, Super PA 3-8, Super PA 4-4, Super PA 4-8, Super PB 3-4, Super PB 4-4, Super PB 5-4, Super PF1. -1 and special PG1-3, when the remaining number of re-variable display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is "2" In addition, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” effect symbol display area, and the right temporary stop symbol, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” effect symbol display area. KZ3-2 is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that becomes the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" effect symbol display area. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D has a variation pattern of Super PA3-4, Super PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1. If the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “3”, the “left” production Left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the symbol display area, right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "right" effect symbol display area, "middle" Is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ4-3 to be the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-5, the specific effect pattern is determined as the pseudo-continuous TP2-1 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the total re-variation display operation to be re-variable after the stop display is performed only once, there is no need to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table. When the variation pattern is the special PG1-3, the specific effect pattern is determined to be the pseudo continuous TP2-1 or the pseudo continuous TP2-2 based on the setting of the specific effect pattern determination table 164B shown in FIG. Since the number of executions of the total re-variation display operation for re-variation after displaying the symbol temporarily stopped is performed at most twice, it is not necessary to select the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D as the use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 62 (A) and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 62 (B) are left final stop symbols as final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols, the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, KZ2-. 3 is composed of data for determination assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 constituted by a combination of three. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 62 (C) includes a left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, a right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and a middle temporary stop symbol 2-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B. The random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3-2 depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ3-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 62 (D) includes the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol 3-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 determined using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C. The random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is assigned to the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, depending on which of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is selected. , KZ4-3, and the like are determined data to be assigned to the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbols using such temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D, for example, as shown in FIG. 63, the pseudo continuous sequences by the specific effect patterns of the pseudo continuous units TP2-1 to TP2-3. Depending on the number of executions of the change, any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 may be used as the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas. Can be determined.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 64 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “development chance” specific effect is executed. include. The temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shows the chance of slipping / development according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that become the left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” effect symbol display area. The random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol is composed of determination data assigned to the development chance items HC1 to HC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3. Yes.

  The determination table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 65 as a table for determining an effect symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the changing promotion effect is executed. . The temporary stop symbol determination table 169 has the same left middle right final stop symbol FZ3- displayed as a stop effect in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas as a definite effect symbol that is a jackpot combination. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols which are 1, FZ3-2 and FZ3-3, the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is set to the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ7-1. , KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 are made up of determination data assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM, a reach effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the effect symbol has reached the reach state is selected and determined from a plurality of types. The reach production pattern determination table is included. As an example of the reach effect pattern determination table, reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B) and reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B). It only has to be stored in the ROM. The reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B) are based on the reach effect pattern determination random number SR9 when the variable display result is “big hit”. Referenced to select and determine from APA1-1 to jackpot APA1-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, jackpot APB2-1 to jackpot APB2-3 It is a table. In the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, when the variable display result is “lost”, the reach effect pattern is lost based on the random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to select and determine from HPA 1-1 to Loss HPA1-3, Loss HPB1-1 to Loss HPB1-3. Each of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, 173B follows the table selection setting as shown in FIG. 67 (C), for example, whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”, and reach It is specified and set as a use table according to the value of the effect table specification buffer (reach effect table specification buffer value).

  Reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B respectively reach reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is “big hit”. Random values SR9 for determining the production pattern are as follows: jackpot APA1-1 to jackpot APA1-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, jackpot APB2-1 to jackpot APB2-3 It consists of selection data to be assigned to reach production patterns. Reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B are used to determine reach effect patterns according to reach effect α1, reach effect α2, and reach effect β1, which are executed according to a variation pattern when the variable display result is “losing”. The random number SR9 is composed of data for selection assigned to reach effect patterns of the loss HPA1-1 to the loss HPA1-3 and the loss HPB1-1 to the loss HPB1-3. Further, each of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, and 173B has a reach effect table designation buffer value corresponding to the reach effect pattern determined based on the random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern. Table data (update data) indicating a reach effect table designation buffer update setting value for updating to either “1” or “2” is included.

  Here, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172A, the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-1 corresponding to the reach effect α1 is higher than the rate of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-1, The reach effect pattern of jackpot APB1-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APA1-2 is greater than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APB1-2 corresponding to the reach effect α2. Although it is high, it is possible to select the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-2, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-3 corresponding to the reach effect α3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-3 Although it is higher than the percentage to do, the reach production pattern of jackpot APB1-3 As can be-option, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set. Further, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172A, corresponding to the reach effect β1, although the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-1 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-1, the big hit The reach effect pattern of APB2-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APA2-2 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APB2-2 corresponding to reach effect β2 However, the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-2 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-3 corresponding to the reach effect β3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-3 Although it is higher than the percentage, select the reach production pattern of big hit APB2-3 As can be, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set.

  On the other hand, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172B, the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-1 corresponding to the reach effect α1 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-1, but the big hit The reach effect pattern of APA1-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APB1-2 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of jackpot APA1-2 corresponding to the reach effect α2. However, the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-2 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB1-3 corresponding to the reach effect α3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA1-3 Although it is higher than the ratio, select the reach production pattern of big hit APA1-3 As can be, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set. Further, in the reach effect pattern determination table 172A, corresponding to the reach effect β1, the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-1 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-1, but the big hit The reach production pattern of APA2-1 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach production pattern of jackpot APB2-2 is higher than the ratio of selecting the reach production pattern of jackpot APA2-2 corresponding to the reach production β2 However, the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-2 can be selected, and the ratio of selecting the reach effect pattern of the big hit APB2-3 corresponding to the reach effect β3 selects the reach effect pattern of the big hit APA2-3 Although it is higher than the ratio, select the reach production pattern of jackpot APA2-3 As can be, selecting data to assign random values SR9 for reach demonstration pattern determined is set.

  According to the setting of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the present operation is selected from a plurality of types including the effect operation that is the same as the effect operation executed last time. An effect operation to be executed as a reach effect can be selected.

  The reach effect pattern determination table 173A is specified and set as a use table when the variable display result is “lost” and the reach effect table designation buffer value is “1”, and the lose HPA1 corresponds to the reach effect α1. -1 reach production pattern can be selected, only the reach HPA1-2 reach production pattern can be selected corresponding to the reach production α2, and the lose HPA1-3 reach corresponding to the reach production β1. Selection data for assigning a random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is set so that only the effect pattern can be selected. The reach effect pattern determination table 173B is specified and set as a use table when the variable display result is “lost” and the reach effect table designation buffer value is “2”, and corresponds to the reach effect α1. Only the reach effect pattern of the lose HPB1-1 can be selected, only the reach effect pattern of the lose HPB1-2 can be selected corresponding to the reach effect α2, and the lose HPB1-3 corresponding to the reach effect β1 can be selected. Selection data for assigning a random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is set so that only the reach effect pattern can be selected. When the reach effect pattern is determined to be one of the loss HPA 1-1 to the lose HPA 1-3, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated to “2”, and the next reach effect is executed. When the reach effect pattern for selecting is selected, the reach effect pattern determination table 173B is specified and set as the use table. On the other hand, when the reach effect pattern is determined to be one of the lose HPB1-1 to the lose HPB1-3, the reach reach table designation buffer value is updated to “1”, thereby the next reach. At the time of selecting the reach effect pattern for executing the effect, the reach effect pattern determination table 173A is specified and set as the use table.

  Thus, when the variable display result is “losing”, when the reach effect pattern is selected from the lose HPA 1-1 to the lose HPA 1-3 using the reach effect pattern determination table 173A, the reach effect table designation is made. The buffer value is updated to “2”, and when the reach effect pattern for executing the next reach effect is selected, if the variable display result is “lost”, the currently selected one of the lost HPA 1-1 to the lost HPA 1-3 is selected. The reach effect pattern determination table 173B in which the table data is configured so that none of the reach effect patterns can be selected is specified and set as the use table. When the variable display result is “losing” and the reach effect pattern is selected from the lose HPB1-1 to the lose HPB1-3 using the reach effect pattern determination table 173B, the reach effect table designating buffer is selected. The value is updated to “1”, and at the time of selecting the reach effect pattern for executing the next reach effect, if the variable display result is “lost”, the currently selected one of the lost HPB1-1 to the lost HPB1-3 is selected. The reach effect pattern determination table 173A in which the table data is configured so that none of the reach effect patterns can be selected is specified and set as the use table. As described above, the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B are each configured to include selection data set so as not to select the reach effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect to be executed this time. ing.

  As another example of the reach effect pattern determination table, a reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 68 may be stored in the ROM. The reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 68 indicates whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost”, reach effect α1 to reach effect α3, reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 (the variable display result is In the case of “big hit”), or according to reach production α1, reach production α2, reach production β1 (when the variable display result is “losing”), the random value SR9 for determining the reach production pattern is set to big hit APA1-1 to big hit APA1-3, jackpot APB1-1 to jackpot APB1-3 (when the variable display result is "big hit") or lose HPA1-1 to lose HPA1-3, lose HPB1-1 to lose HPB1-3 (variable display result is " In the case of “losing”), it is composed of selection data assigned to the reach effect pattern.

  Here, in the reach effect pattern determination table 174 shown in FIG. 68, when the variable display result is “lost”, the reach effect pattern is selected from among the lose HPA1-1 and the lose HPB1-1 corresponding to the reach effect α1. The reach production pattern is selected from among the loss HPA1-2 and the loss HPB1-2 corresponding to the reach production α2, and the reach production pattern is selected from the loss HPA1-3 and the loss HPB1-3 corresponding to the reach production β1. Selection data for assigning a random effect value SR9 for determining a reach effect pattern is set so as to be selected and determined from among them. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the reach production pattern is selected from the big hit APA1-1 and the big hit APB1-1 corresponding to the reach production α1, and the reach production corresponding to the reach production α2. Reach so that the pattern is selected from jackpot APA1-2 and jackpot APB1-2, and the reach effect pattern is selected and determined from jackpot APA1-3 and jackpot APB1-3 corresponding to reach effect α3. Selection data for assigning a random number SR9 for determining the effect pattern is set. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, a reach production pattern is selected from big hit APA2-1 and big hit APB2-1 corresponding to reach production β1, and reach production corresponding to reach production β2. For determining the reach effect pattern so that the pattern is selected from the big hit APA2-2 and the big hit APB2-2 and selected from the big hit APA2-3 and the big hit APB2-3 in correspondence with the reach effect β3. The selection data to which the random number SR9 is assigned is set. Thereby, when the variable display result is “losing”, it is possible to select from among a plurality of types of effect operations in the reach effect α1, the reach effect α2, and the reach effect β1 that are executed according to the variation pattern. . Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect operations in reach effect α1 to reach effect α3 and reach effect β1 to reach effect β3 executed according to the variation pattern are selected from a plurality of types. be able to.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 69, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 during the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbols until the finalized symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. It is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as the variable display operation, the effect display operation in the reach effect, and the effect display operation in the specific effect as the symbol variation control pattern. Each symbol variation control pattern includes, for example, various effects according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. It is composed of control data for controlling the operation, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like in time series.

  Further, the control pattern table stored in the ROM includes various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. In the various effect control pattern table 182 shown in FIG. 70, a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls in the period controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state are stored as the effect control patterns. That's fine. Each effect control pattern includes an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, an audio control data, a lamp control data, an end code, etc. The contents of various effects control according to the progress, the switching timing of the effects control, and the like may be set in time series.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (step S702). Then, the timer interrupt flag is monitored (step S703). If the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S702. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S704), and executes the effect control process of steps S705 to S707.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S705). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. Further, a frame lamp flash control process for controlling the frame lamp flash lighting is executed (step S707). Then, control goes to a step S702.

  In the frame lamp flash control process, the effect control CPU 101 controls the blinking of the frame lamp 28 when a condition for starting the frame lamp flash control is satisfied (specifically, when the frame flash flag is set in step S650). Is determined using a random number (not shown in FIG. 51), and when it is determined that the frame lamp 28 blinks, the frame lamp 28 is used for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Is controlled to blink in a short cycle. And when predetermined time passes, the lighting state of the frame lamp 28 will be returned to the original state (for example, the state according to the production mode at the time of production pattern fluctuation).

  72 and 73 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S705). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 4 specifying command) in the RAM. The displayed display result specifying command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command to jackpot start 4 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to the jackpot start 4 designation command reception flag. Set (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command designating the number of reserved memories (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 updates (+1) the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved memory number counter) in the reserved storage area in the RAM. (Step S632). Further, in the effect display device 9, for example, the number of on-hold storage display units 18c whose display color changes is updated (+1) (step S633). Further, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1 (step S634). The random number counter is a counter for generating a random number for determining the first sub notice pattern. In this embodiment, the count value of the random number counter takes a value in the range of 0 to 200, and when the count value reaches 200, the value is returned to 0. Note that the random number counter is also updated in the random number update process in step S702.

  Further, if the received effect control command is an effect control command for which the winning judgment is not specified (step S635), the effect control CPU 101 increments the value of the random number counter by 1 (step S636) and sets the count value of the random number counter. A random number is extracted by reading (step S637), and a continuous notice is determined (step S638).

  In addition, when the received effect control command is an effect control command designated for winning determination normal jackpot (step S641), the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1 (step S642), and a random number is extracted (step S643). The continuous notice is determined (step S644). Also, a frame flash flag is set (step S645). When the frame flash flag is set, the frame lamp flash control start condition is satisfied, and the frame lamp flash lighting control is started in the frame lamp flash control process (step S707).

  Further, even when the received effect control command is an effect control command designated for winning determination probability variation big hit (step S646), the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1 (step S647), and a random number is extracted (step S648). The continuous notice is determined (step S649). Also, a frame flash flag is set (step S650).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command designated to hold memory count subtraction (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 updates (-1) the value of the hold memory count counter in the RAM (step S652). In addition, the number of on-hold storage display units 18c whose display color changes, for example, in the effect display device 9 is updated (-1) (step S653).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command (background specifying command: 9500 (H) to 9503 (H)) for specifying the background in the effect display device 9 (Y in step S660), the effect control CPU 101 It is checked whether the recovery background change flag is set (step S661). The recovery background change flag is set when a high base state (short-time state or probability change state) is specified in a power failure gaming state designation command transmitted at the time of power failure recovery. When the restoration background change flag is set (Y in step S661), control for displaying a short-time background as the background (background image, background color, etc.) of the effect display device 9 is executed (step S662). On the other hand, when the restoration background change flag is not set (N in step S661), the effect control CPU 101 sets a background display state flag corresponding to the content of the background designation command (step S6163). Specifically, if the background specification command is the normal state background specification command, the background display state flag in the normal state is set, and if the background specification command is the probability change state background specification command, the background display state in the probability change state Set the flag, set the background display state flag when the background specification command is in the time reduction state if the background specification command is the background specification command, and set the background when in the chance mode state if the background specification command is the chance mode background specification command Set the display status flag. Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms that the current gaming state has been changed to the probability change state (although it has been changed to the probability change state) based on the set / reset of the latent probability change flag (see step S893). (Hidden gaming state) is confirmed (step S664), and if it is a latent probability changing state, control for displaying the background in the short-time state as the background (background image, background color, etc.) of the effect display device 9 is executed. (Step S665). If it is not the latent probability changing state, control for displaying a background corresponding to the gaming state confirmed based on the background designation command as the background of the effect display device 9 is executed (step S666).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S659). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  Next, the determination of continuous notice will be described. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of a notice type determination table. As described above, in this embodiment, the notice type (1) and the notice type (2) are provided as the notice types of the continuous notice. In this embodiment, the random number for determining the first sub-notice pattern type is used to determine whether the notice type of the continuous notice is the notice type (1) or the notice type (2). Do not execute). As shown in FIG. 75, in the notice type determination table, determination values 0 to 150 to be compared with a random number value for determining the first sub-notice pattern type are assigned to “No notice” and “Notice type (1)” is assigned. Are assigned determination values 151 to 170 to be compared with random values for determining the first sub-notice pattern type, and “notice type (2)” is compared with random values for determining the first sub-notice pattern type. Values 171 to 190 are assigned.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of a judgment type (1) determination table. As shown in FIG. 76, a plurality of judgment type (1) judgment tables are provided according to the contents of the winning judgment result designation command. The notice effect in the notice type (1) (the notice X, Y, Z, M, N, and the effect having the same contents as the special effect for the sudden probability variation big hit) is a reserved storage from which the winning determination result command is transmitted. Since it is a notice effect executed in the change before the start of the change based on the change (the change based on the hold storage before the winning determination result command is transmitted), at least the notice type At the time of determining the effect pattern of the notice effect of (1), one or more reserved memories must exist.

  (A) is a table in the case of receiving an effect control command specified to be out of winning judgment, (B) is a table in the case of receiving an effect control command to determine a winning big bonus, (C) Is a table in the case of receiving an effect control command for determining a winning winning decision variable jackpot, and (D) receiving an effect control command for specifying a sudden winning variable determining bonus game or an effect control command specifying a winning bonus determining small hit. It is a table in the case of.

  As shown in (A), when an effect control command is specified that is out of winning determination, only the notice effect Z is set, so the notice effect Z is always determined. As shown in (B), when receiving an effect control command for determining a winning big bonus, a notice effect Z, Y or an effect having the same content as the special effect for sudden probability change (FIGS. 46 and 47). Is decided. As shown in (C), when receiving an effect control command for determining a winning decision probability change jackpot, an effect having the same content as the notice effect Z, Y, X or a special effect for sudden probability change (FIGS. 46 and 47). Is determined. As shown in (D), when an effect control command for sudden winning change determined for winning a prize or an effect control command specified for winning a prize for determining small hit is received, a notice effect M, N for suddenly changing or winning a prize (see FIG. 40, see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49).

  77 and 78 are explanatory diagrams showing the notice type (2) determination table. (A) shows the relationship between the number of reserved memories and the number of executions of continuous notice when receiving an effect control command that is designated to be out of winning judgment, and (B) receives an effect control command that is designated to determine a winning big bonus. Shows the relationship between the number of pending storages and the number of consecutive notices executed. And (C) shows the relationship between the number of pending storages and the number of executions of continuous notice when receiving the effect control command designated at the winning determination probability variation big hit.

  In this embodiment, when receiving an effect control command for specifying a winning decision, a continuous notice can be executed if the random number value matches 29 or 124 (judgment value for notice type (2)). When receiving an effect control command that is designated for winning a prize, a normal jackpot, a continuous notice can be executed if the random number value matches 7 to 27 or 105 to 126 (judgment value for notice type (2)). . Then, when an effect control command designated for winning determination probability variation jackpot is received, if the random number value matches 3 to 17, 38 to 67, or 85 to 126 (determination value for notice type (2)), continuous notice is given. Is feasible.

  In addition, when an effect control command for winning determination normal jackpot designation and winning determination positive change jackpot designation is received, continuous notice (continuous notice D) using the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, and the lamp can be executed. .

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous notice determination process executed in steps S638, S644, and S649. In the continuous notice determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first uses the notice type determination table shown in FIG. 75 to determine whether the notice type is the notice type (1) or the notice type (2). It is determined whether to do so (step S670). Specifically, the random number value for determining the first sub-notice pattern type is extracted, and the notice type (and the notice is executed) by comparing the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the notice type determination table. Or not).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not no notice is determined as the notice type (step S671). If it is determined that there is no advance notice (Y in step S671), the process for determining the continuous advance notice is terminated. When the notice type (1) is determined (Y in step S672), it is determined whether the continuous notice of the notice type (1) is being executed (step S673). Whether or not it is being executed can be determined by a continuous advance notice executing flag that is an internal flag set during execution. If continuous notice is not being executed, the notice type (1) determination table is selected (step S675). The notice type (1) determination table is a table in which the information shown in FIG. 76 is set, and when receiving the effect control command specifying that the determination at the time of winning is missed, the information shown in FIG. 76 (A). When a table corresponding to information is selected and an effect control command designated for winning judgment normal jackpot is received, a table corresponding to the information shown in FIG. 76 is selected, the table corresponding to the information shown in FIG. 76 (C) is selected. The table corresponding to the information shown in FIG.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the same notice type (1) determination value as the extracted random number value is set in the notice type (1) determination table, and the notice type (1) is determined. An effect pattern for the continuous notice effect is determined (step S681). Further, the number of executions of the notice effect is confirmed based on the number of stored storage at the present time. Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the content of the continuous notice effect (effect pattern) in the notice content buffer in the RAM, and stores the number of executions in the execution number buffer in the RAM (step S683), and sets the continuous notice lottery flag set. (Step S684).

  If it is confirmed in step S672 that the notice type (2) has been determined (N in step S672), it is determined whether continuous notice of the notice type (2) is being executed (step S677). Whether or not it is being executed can be determined by a continuous advance notice executing flag that is an internal flag set during execution. If continuous notice is not being executed, the notice type (2) determination table is selected (step S680). The judgment type (2) determination table is a table in which the information shown in FIG. 77 and FIG. 78 is set, and when an effect control command specifying a winning determination is received is shown in FIG. 77 (A). When a table corresponding to the information shown is selected and an effect control command for determining a winning big prize is specified, a table corresponding to the information shown in FIG. When a control command is received, a table corresponding to the information shown in FIG. 78 (C) is selected.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the same notice type (2) determination value as the extracted random number value is set in the notice type (2) determination table, and the notice type (2). An effect pattern for the continuous notice effect is determined (step S681). In the determination table for the notice type (2), a determination value to be compared with a random value is not assigned to each effect pattern, and the content (effect pattern) of the notice effect and the execution are executed according to the number of reserved storage at the present time. The number of times is automatically determined. Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the content of the continuous notice (effect pattern) in the notice content buffer in the RAM, stores the number of executions in the execution number buffer in the RAM (step S683), and sets the continuous notice lottery flag. (Step S684).

  In this embodiment, as the notice type (2) determination table, there is no table corresponding to the effect control command for the sudden decision variable big hit designation or the prize decision small hit designation at the time of winning determination, so the determination at winning is determined. If an effect control command is received that suddenly specifies a promising big hit or a winning judgment small hit, it is determined that there is no notice.

  Through the above processing, the random number counter can be used to specify the number of stored memory, specify the judgment at the time of winning a prize, specify the normal jackpot at the time of winning, specify the correct jackpot at the time of winning, specify the sudden jackpot at the winning judgment, or specify the jackpot at the winning sudden decision Each time a control command is received, it will step forward, and the effect control command will be specified for losing a prize at the time of winning, specifying a normal big hit at the time of winning a prize, specifying a positive jackpot at the time of winning a prize, specifying a sudden big odds at the time of winning a prize, or specifying a big jackpot at a winning judgment. Upon receipt, a lottery of whether or not to give a continuous notice and a notice type of the continuous notice is executed. When it is determined that the continuous notice of the predetermined notice type is to be performed, the content (effect pattern) of the notice effect in the notice type is determined. Further, the number of continuous notices to be executed is also determined according to the current number of reserved memories. Which presentation means is used for continuous notice and which presentation mode is used for continuous notice is based on the reception of the determination result command and the designation control command for the number of reserved memories. Will be decided independently.

  Also, for example, different presentation modes can be realized by changing the sound generation pattern in the continuous notices B and C, or different presentation forms can be realized by changing the blinking pattern of the lamps in the continuous notices C and D. In the continuous notices A to D, even when more types of continuous notice effects are performed by changing the character type, the notice type (1) based on the information shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 77, and FIG. In the determination table for use or the determination table for notice type (1), if the distribution of a large number of effect modes is set, which effect means is used for continuous notification and which effect mode is used for continuous notification The effect control means uniquely determines whether or not based on the reception of the determination result command and the effect control command with the reserved memory number designation. Door can be.

  As will be described later, when the execution control CPU 101 performs variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 after the execution count that is not zero is determined, the notice control effect is provided in the effect symbol variation period corresponding to the execution count. (Continuous notice) is controlled.

  In this embodiment, the determination result when the number of reserved memories is 0 is also set in the determination table for the notice type (2), but the effect control command for specifying the number of reserved memories precedes the determination result command. Since the continuous notice is not performed when the number of reserved memories is 0 and the number of reserved memories is 0, data when the number of reserved memories is 0 may not be set in the determination table for the notice type (2). . Even if it is not set, the effect control means can determine based on the received start control memory number designation effect control command that the continuous notice is not performed when the reserved memory number is zero.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S706) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, any one of steps S800 to S808 is performed according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. When the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S801).

  Preliminary notice selection process (step S801): It is determined whether or not to perform a notice effect (notice effect that is not a continuous notice) and the type of notice effect when it is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S802).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S802): Control is performed so that the effect symbol and the variation of the effect symbol are started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S803): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S804).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S804): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing stop of all symbols, the variation of the effect symbol (and effect symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) ) Is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S805) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S805): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S806).

  In-round processing (step S806): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S807). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S808).

  Post-round processing (step S807): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S806).

  Big hit end effect process (step S808): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception wait process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the notice selection process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a notice selection process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the notice selection process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice is being executed (step S911). If not being executed, it is confirmed whether or not the continuous notice lottery flag has been set (step S912). If the continuous notice lottery flag has been set, that is, if it has been decided to perform the continuous notice, the continuous notice lottery flag is reset (step S913), and the contents of the execution number buffer are set in the execution number counter. (Step S914). Then, a continuous notice execution flag is set (step S915).

  Also, a notice start time determination timer corresponding to the decided notice effect is started (step S916). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to all symbol variation start processing (step S802) (step S917). The notice start time determination timer is a timer for determining the timing for starting the notice effect after the change of the symbol is started in the effect display device 9.

  If it is confirmed in step S911 that the continuous notice is being executed, the production control CPU 101 decrements the execution number counter by 1 (step S921), and if the execution number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S916 (step S922). When the execution number counter reaches 0, it means that the continuous notice for the determined number of executions has already been completed. In that case, the process proceeds to step S925.

  In step S912, when it is confirmed that the continuous notice lottery flag has not been set, the CPU 101 that is intoxicated by the production control first sets the notice type of the normal notice that is not the continuous notice (the notice type (α) or the notice type). (Β) or not to execute the advance notice) is determined (step S925). Specifically, the random number value for determining the second sub-notice pattern type is extracted, and the extracted random number value is compared with the determination value set in the notice type determination table (not shown), thereby obtaining the notice type. (And whether or not to run a notice).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not no notice is determined as the notice type (step S926). If it is determined that there is no prior notice (Y in step S926), the process proceeds to step S917. When the notice type (α) or the notice type (β) is determined (N in step S926), the effect control CPU 101 extracts the random value for determining the second sub-notice pattern, and the extracted random number value and effect. An effect pattern of the notice type (α) or (β) is determined by comparing with a determination value set in a pattern determination table (not shown) (step S927). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916. The effect pattern determination table for determining the effect pattern of the notice effect is provided with an effect pattern determining table for the notice type (α) and an effect pattern determining table for the notice type (β). Yes. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control confirms whether the notice type determined in step S925 is the notice type (α) or the notice type (β), selects a table corresponding to the notice type, and determines the effect pattern. To do.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S821).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect symbol variation setting processing (step S822). The contents of the effect symbol variation setting process will be described later (FIGS. 84 and 85).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table (one of the symbol variation control pattern tables shown in FIG. 69) corresponding to the effect control pattern set (set) in step S518 (step S823). Then, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer in the process data of the selected process table (data constituting the process table) (step S824).

  The effect control CPU 101 performs effect devices (effect display device 9 as effect parts, various lamps as effect components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). And the control of the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S825). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S826), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process (step S803). (Step S827).

  84 and 85 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect symbol variation setting process executed in step S828 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the display result specifying command (step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the effect symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S502; Yes), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern that executes a specific effect of “end of development opportunity eye”. It is determined whether or not (step S503). As an example, if it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, if the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA 1-7 (see FIG. 9). It is determined that the variation pattern is to execute a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

When it is determined in step S503 that the variation pattern is to execute the specific effect of “end of development chance eyes” (step S503; Yes), the final stop symbol constituting any of the development chance eyes HC1 to HC8 and A combination of determined effect symbols is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, the final stop symbol determination table 160D shown in FIG. 52D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-4, FZ that become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8
The combination of 1-5 and FZ1-6 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  When it is determined in step S503 that it is not a variation pattern that executes the specific effect of “end of development chance” (step S503; No), the combination of the definite effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination Is determined (step S505). As an example, in the process of step S505, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 52 (A) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the effect symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 52 (B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the effect symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 52C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, a random value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, on the basis of the extracted random number SR1-3 and the left and right outcome type DC1-1, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C.

  In this way, in the process of step S505, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the effect symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Thus, the combination of the confirmed effect symbols does not become a reach combination or jackpot combination, and even if it is other than the reach combination or jackpot combination, the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The development chances HC1 to HC8 shown in (B), the chances of success TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. 2C, and a certain non-reach combination as shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of definite effect symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S506). As an example, in the process of step S506, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 55A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the same effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is obtained. decide. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 55B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the effect symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, the effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  Thus, in the process of step S506, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the “left” and “right” effects other than the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. The effect symbols for the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the symbol display area are determined. Then, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the effect symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 in the “medium” effect symbol display area where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last, and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2-1. , The design difference with the effect design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the effect design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  If the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the variable display result is “small hit” or the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is It is determined whether it is one of the “surprise” or other than that (step S507). At this time, when the variable display result is “small hit”, or when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (step S507; Yes), for example, the change pattern designation command By reading the EXT data or the like, it is determined whether the specified variation pattern is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 or any other variation (step S508). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, all the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-4 specify that the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. Therefore, if it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is any of the special PG 1-1 to special PG 1-4 (step S508; Yes), the process proceeds to step S503, and the processes in steps S504 and S505 are performed. By either of these, the definite effect design used as the last stop design is determined. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-4, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is special in step S503. If it is a variation pattern of PG1-4 (see FIG. 9), it is determined that the variation pattern executes a specific effect of “end of development chance”.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-4 variation pattern (step S508; No), the designated variation pattern is the variation of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3. It is determined whether the pattern is one of the patterns or other patterns (step S509). Here, as shown in FIG. 9, each of the variation patterns of the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-3 specifies that the “normal” reach effect is performed after the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state. ing. For this reason, if it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is one of the special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; Yes), the process proceeds to step S506, and the last combination constituting the reach combination is performed. A finalized design to be a stop design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S509 that the variation pattern is other than the variation pattern of special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 (step S509; No), the designated variation pattern is variation of special PG3-1 to special PG3-3. One of the patterns. Here, as shown in FIG. 9, all of the variation patterns of the special PG 3-1 to the special PG 3-3, the combination of the determined production symbol that is the variable display result of the production symbol is any one of the chance chance items TC 1 to TC 4. It is specified to do. Corresponding to the designation of any of the variation patterns of these special PG3-1 to special PG3-3, the combination of the definitive effect symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any one of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4 is determined. (Step S510). As an example, in the process of step S510, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 56C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbol FZ4-1, FZ4-, which becomes any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4. 2, the combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed effect symbol.

  In step S507, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S507; No), among the cases where the variable display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “ It is determined whether any one of “normal big hit” and “third probability variation” or any other one (step S511). At this time, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit” or when the big hit type is “third probability variation” (step S511; Yes), the final effect symbol which becomes the final stop symbol constituting the normal big hit combination. Is determined (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 56 (A) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  When the big hit type is neither “normal” nor “third probability variation” in step S511 (step S511; No), it is determined whether or not to shift to the latent probability variation state (step S513A). Specifically, a latent probability changing random number (not shown in FIG. 51) for determining whether or not to shift to the latent probability changing state is extracted, and depending on whether or not the value of the latent probability changing random number is a predetermined value. Decide whether to shift to the latent probability change state. When it is determined to shift to the latent probability variation big hit (step S513B; Yes), a latent probability variation flag indicating that the latent probability variation state is to be shifted is set (step S513C), and in step S512, the final big hit combination is formed. The combination of the definite effect design which becomes a stop design is determined. When it is determined not to shift to the latent probability variation state (step S513B; No), the probability variation big hit combination is configured corresponding to the big hit type being either “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”. The combination of the confirmed effect symbols that will be the final stop symbol is determined (step S513D). As an example, in the process of step S513D, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 56 (B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed effect design.

  In this embodiment, in order to shift to the latent probability variation state that hides the transition to the probability variation state, even if the jackpot type is “first probability variation” or “second probability variation”, the fixed effect is produced at a certain rate. As a symbol, a non-probable variation symbol (a combination of left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3-3, which is one of the normal jackpot combinations) is determined.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S504, S505, and S506, or after performing any of the processes of steps S510, S512, and S513D, the specific effect setting process is performed (step S514). FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the specific effect setting process executed in step S514. In this specific effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern having no specific effect (step S551). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect (step S551; Yes), the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the variation pattern has a specific effect (step S551; No), main notice setting processing is executed (step S552). Subsequently, it is determined whether the specific effect is any one of “slip” and “pseudo ream (chance eyes)”, or a specific effect other than these (step S553). At this time, if it is one of the specific effects of “slip” and “pseudo-run” (step S553; Yes), the specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect is selected and set as the use table (step) S554). As an example, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 57A is set in the case of the “slip” specific effect, and shown in FIG. 57B in the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect. The specific effect pattern determination table 164B is set.

  Following the process of step S554, the specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of types and determined (step S555). As an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, numerical data indicating a random value SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is selected from the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164A set in step S554. To decide. In the case of the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6-2 for determining the second specific effect pattern is extracted from a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6-2, the specific effect patterns are changed to pseudo-sequences TP2-1 to TP2-3 by referring to the specific-effect pattern determination table 164B set in step S554. Decide on one.

  When it is determined in step S553 that the specific effect is other than “slip” and “pseudo-continuous” (step S553; No), after the process of step S555 is executed, the specific effect is “slip”, “pseudo”. It is determined whether it is any of “ream”, “development opportunity”, or a specific effect other than these (step S556). At this time, if it is a specific effect other than “slip”, “pseudo train (chance eye)”, and “expansion chance eye” (step S556; No), the specific effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is any one of the specific effects of “slip”, “pseudo ream (chance eyes)”, and “expansion chance eyes” (step S556; Yes), the temporary stop symbol to be displayed temporarily stopped in the specific effects Is determined (step S557), the specific effect setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S557, as an example, in the case of a specific effect of “slip”, a temporary stop symbol determination table according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 61 (E) based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S555. One of 166A to 166D is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development opportunity is extracted. Then, by referring to any of the set temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D based on the extracted random number SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1, the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2, the right temporary stop symbol 1 -3, the effect symbol which becomes any of the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 is determined.

  As another example, when the specific effect of “pseudo-continuous” is set, first, the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation is set to a constant M based on the specific effect pattern determined in step S555. For example, the constant M is set to “1” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-1, and the constant M is set to “2” in the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-2. In the case of the specific effect pattern of the pseudo-continuous TP2-3, the constant M is set to “3”. At this time, a variable N indicating the determined number of temporary stop symbol combinations is set to “0”. When the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 62A is selected and set as the use table, while the variation pattern is super PA3-4, super In the case of any one of PA3-8, Super PA4-4, Super PA4-8, Super PB3-4, Super PB4-4, Super PB5-4, Super PF1-1, Special PG1-3, FIG. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in B) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to either the set temporary stop symbol determination table 167A or the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 The combination of left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S557 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 62C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1 and KZ3 that become any one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -2, KZ3-3 combination is determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M in this way, the process of step S557 is terminated. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D shown in FIG. 62 (D) is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, KZ4, which becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. -2 and a combination of KZ4-3 are determined. After determining the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 in this way, the process of step S557 is terminated.

  As another example, in the case of a specific effect of “Development Chance”, the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 shown in FIG. 64 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the slip / development opportunity is extracted. Then, by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 168 based on the extracted random value SR3, the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ6-1, KZ6-2, and KZ6-3, which become one of the development chances HC1 to HC8, are displayed. Determine the combination.

  As an example of the main notice setting process executed in step S552, a process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87 may be executed. In this example, the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E shown in FIGS. 58A to 58C may be stored in the ROM, and the main notice table designation buffer may be provided in the RAM. In the main notice setting process shown in FIG. 87, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a fluctuation pattern having a specific effect of “main notice” (step S701). At this time, if the variation pattern has no specific effect of “main notice” (step S701; No), the main notice setting process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the variation pattern has a specific effect of “main notice” (step S701; Yes), the third specific effect pattern is obtained from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating the determination random number SR6-3 is extracted (step S702). Further, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 58D, any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E corresponding to the main notice table designation buffer value is specified and set as a use table (step S703). Then, based on the random value SR6-3 extracted in step S702, by referring to any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E set in step S703, the effect operation in the specific effect of “Main notice” is performed. The corresponding specific notice pattern for main notice is selected and determined (step S704).

  After determining the specific effect pattern for main notice in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to be updated by the main notice table designation buffer update setting value corresponding to the specific effect pattern (step S704). S705). For example, when the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice 3-1-2 in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to “1”. Update. On the other hand, when the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-2-1 and the main notice TP3-2-2 in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to “ Update to 2 ”. When the specific effect pattern is selected and determined from the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2 in step S704, the main notice table designation buffer value is set to “3”. Update.

  By executing the processing of step S705 in this way, the main notice TP3-1-1 and the main notice TP3-1 prepared for each type of effect operation corresponding to the variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “main notice” are provided. -2, every time one of the specific effect patterns of the main notice TP3-2-1, the main notice TP3-2-2, the main notice TP3-3-1 and the main notice TP3-3-2 is selected The main notice table designation buffer value corresponding to the specified specific effect pattern can be updated so as to be set. In other words, every time the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice” is selected and determined from among a plurality of types, the specific effect of the “main notice” is executed next time according to the type of the determined effect operation. Therefore, a main notice table designation buffer value is set so that a use table at the time of selecting a specific effect pattern can be specified. In the process of step S703, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA 1-6, any one of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E corresponding to the main notice table designation buffer value is identified and set as a use table. By doing this, any of the specific effect pattern determination tables 164C to 164E can be set so that the previously performed effect operation is not selected this time as the specific effect of the “main notice”.

  If it is determined in step S751 that the variation pattern has a specific effect of “main notice” (step S751; Yes), the third specific effect pattern is obtained from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Numerical data indicating the determination random number SR6-3 is extracted (step S752). At this time, the specific effect pattern determination table 164F is set as a use table (step S753). Then, by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table 164F set in step S753 based on the random value SR6-3 extracted in step S752, the main notification for the main effect corresponding to the effect operation in the specific effect of “main notice” Is selected and determined (step S754).

  After determining the specific effect pattern for the main notice in step S754, whether or not the specific effect pattern is the specific effect pattern including the same effect operation as the effect operation in the specific effect of the previous “main notice”. Is determined (step S755). As an example, the CPU 101 for effect control is a specific effect pattern in which the specific effect pattern stored in the main notice specific effect pattern storage buffer and the specific effect pattern determined in step S754 include the same effect operation. Or not.

  If it is determined in step S755 that the specific effect pattern includes the same effect operation (step S755; Yes), a setting for replacing the specific effect pattern is performed (step S756). As an example, in the process of step S756, if the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-6, among the main notice TP3-1-1, main notice TP3-2-1, and main notice TP3-3-1, step S754 The specific effect pattern is replaced by changing it to a different one from the specific effect pattern determined in (1). At this time, either the random number SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern or the specific effect pattern determination table 164F is changed to one prepared in advance as a preliminary, and processing corresponding to steps S752 to S754 is performed. You may make it perform. Alternatively, the process corresponding to steps S752 to S754 may be executed after waiting until the numerical data indicating the random value SR6-3 for determining the third specific effect pattern is updated.

  When it is determined in step S755 that the specific effect pattern does not include the same effect operation (step S755; No), or after the process of step S756 is executed, the specific effect pattern for main notice is supported. The specific effect pattern is set by storing the stored data in the specific effect pattern storage buffer for main notice (step S757).

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S514 shown in FIG. 84, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In this changing promotion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” or not. (Step S571). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise” (step S571; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S571 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “probable” (step S571; Yes), the variation shown in FIG. The promotion effect execution determination table 165A is selected and set as a use table (step S572). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the promotion effect execution is extracted (step S573). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S573, referring to the changing promotion effect execution determination table 165A set in step S572, the jackpot type is “normal”, “first certain change”. The presence / absence of the changing promotion effect is determined depending on which one is “third probability variation” (step S574). At this time, if it is determined that there is no changing promotion effect (step S575; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that there is a changing promotion effect (step S575; Yes), a temporary stop symbol to be displayed for temporary stop in the changing promotion effect is determined (step S576). Then, the changing promotion effect setting process ends. In the process of step S576, as an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 shown in FIG. 65 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of promotion effect is extracted. Then, referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 169 based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR2, the effect symbols determined as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are displayed. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number.

  If it is determined in step S513A in FIG. 85 to shift to the latent probability changing state, a non-probable variable symbol (usually a combination of symbols for a big jackpot) is used as the final stop symbol even if the changing promotion effect is executed. Since it has been determined (see step S512), the uncertain variable symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the fluctuation.

  Next, reach effect setting processing shown in FIG. 84 is executed (step S517). As an example of the reach effect setting process executed in step S517, a process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 89 may be executed. In this example, reach effect pattern determination tables 172A and 172B shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B) and reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B) are stored in the ROM. The RAM may be provided with a reach designating table designation buffer. In the reach effect setting process shown in FIG. 89, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern of “non-reach” or “normal” or other variation patterns ( Step S721). At this time, if the variation pattern is “non-reach” or “normal” (step S721; Yes), the reach effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S721 that the variation pattern is other than “non-reach” or “normal” (step S721; No), numerical data indicating a random effect value SR9 for determining the reach effect pattern is extracted (step S721). S722). Further, according to the table selection setting shown in FIG. 67C, the reach effect pattern determination table 172A is determined depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “lost” and the reach effect table designation buffer value. , 172B, 173A, 173B is specified and set as a use table (step S723). Then, based on the random value SR9 extracted in step S722, by referring to one of the reach effect pattern determination tables 172A, 172B, 173A, 173B set in step S723, reach corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect is made. An effect pattern is selected and determined (step S724).

  After the reach effect pattern is determined in step S724, the reach effect table designating buffer update setting value corresponding to the reach effect pattern is set to update the reach effect table designating buffer value (step S725). For example, in step S724, the reach production patterns are jackpot APA1-1 to jackpot APA1-3, jackpot APA2-1 to jackpot APA2-3, lose HPA1-1 to lose HPA1-3, lose HPA2-1 to lose HPA2-3. If it is selected and determined, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated to “2”. On the other hand, in step S724, the reach production pattern is the big hit APB1-1 to the big hit APB1-3, the big hit APB2-1 to the big hit APB2-3, the lost HPB1-1 to the lost HPB1-3, the lost HPB2-1 to the lost HPB2. If it is selected and determined from -3, the reach effect table designation buffer value is updated to "1".

  By executing the processing of step S725 in this manner, each time a reach effect pattern is selected, the reach effect table designating buffer value corresponding to the selected reach effect pattern can be updated. In other words, every time a production operation in a reach production is selected and determined from among a plurality of types, a use table at the time of selecting a reach production pattern for executing a reach production next time according to the type of the decided production operation The reach effect table designation buffer value is set. Then, in the process of step S723, when the variable display result is “losing”, any of the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B is specified and set as a use table, and the effect previously executed as the reach effect is set. Either of the reach effect pattern determination tables 173A and 173B can be set so that the operation is not selected this time.

  If it is determined in step S771 that the variation pattern is other than “non-reach” or “normal” (step S771; No), for example, a reach effect is obtained from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Numerical data indicating the random number SR9 for pattern determination is extracted (step S772). At this time, the reach effect pattern determination table 174 is set as a use table (step S773). Based on the random value SR9 extracted in step S772, the reach effect pattern determination table 174 set in step S773 is referred to, and the reach effect pattern corresponding to the effect operation in the reach effect is selected and determined ( Step S774).

  After the reach effect pattern is determined in step S774, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S775). At this time, if it is determined that the variable display result is not “big hit” (step S775; No), the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 corresponds to the same effect operation as the effect operation in the previous reach effect. It is determined whether or not it is an effect pattern (step S776). As an example, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not the reach effect pattern stored in the reach effect pattern storage buffer matches the reach effect pattern determined in step S774. At this time, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the reach effect pattern matches regardless of the effect operation in the specific effect of the “main notice”.

  When it is determined in step S776 that the reach effect pattern corresponds to the same effect operation (step S776; Yes), a setting for replacing the reach effect pattern is performed (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, if the variable display result is “lost”, the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 among the lose HPA 1-1 and the lose HPB 1-1 when executing the reach effect α1. When the reach effect α2 is executed, the reach effect pattern is changed to one different from the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 among the lose HPA1-2 and the lose HPB1-2. In the case of execution, the reach effect pattern is replaced by changing the reach effect pattern determined in step S774 among the lose HPA 1-3 and the lose HPB 1-3.

  If it is determined in step S775 that the variable display result is “big hit” (step S775; Yes), or if it is determined in step S776 that the reach effect pattern does not correspond to the same effect operation (step S776). No), or after the process of step S777 is executed, the reach effect pattern is set by storing the storage data corresponding to the reach effect pattern in the reach effect pattern storage buffer (step S778).

  After executing the reach effect setting process in step S517 shown in FIG. 84, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S518). At this time, the effect control CPU 101, for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the specific effect pattern determined in step S555 shown in FIG. 86, or the variation determined in step S574 shown in FIG. The symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 69 corresponds to the presence / absence of the promotion effect and whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern for executing the specific effect of “main notice”. One of the stored multiple types of symbol variation control patterns (process table) is selected and set as a usage pattern. Also, for example, step S714 shown in FIG. 87 is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, for example, step S724 shown in FIG. 89 is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Although not shown in FIG. 84, following the processing of step S518, for example, corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value (time measured by the process timer) indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S518. The initial value of the process timer is set.

  After that, as described above, the display control command corresponding to the effect display control data (process data) included in the symbol variation control pattern is supplied to the VDP. ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”effect symbol display area starts to change, and“ Left ”and“ Right ”color symbol display area starts color symbol change The setting for starting the variation of various symbols in the effect display device 9 is performed (steps S835A to S835C).

  FIG. 90 shows the value of the notice start time determining timer in the effect control process during the effect symbol changing process, if the notice start time determining timer is operating (if it has not timed out). Is decremented by 1 (step S830). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the notice start time determination timer has timed out (step S831). If time-out has occurred, it is confirmed whether or not the notice effect determined to be executed is continuous notice B or D (step S832). When the continuous notice B or D is executed, the sound number data corresponding to the continuous notice B or D is output to the sound output board 70 (step S833). In the voice output board 70, the voice synthesis IC 703 reads data corresponding to the sound number data from the voice data ROM 704, generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the read data, and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 707 to the speaker 27.

  The effect control CPU 101 decrements the values of the process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer by −1 (steps S840A, S840B, and S840C).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S841). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S842). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S843). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data and the lamp control execution data set next (step S844).

  If the variation control timer has timed out (step S 845), the effect control CPU 101 displays the next display screen of the effect symbol of the left middle right (displayed after 30 ms has elapsed since the last effect symbol display switching time). Image data of a power screen is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step S846). In this way, the effect control device 9 realizes effect pattern variation control. The VDP 109 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 9. As such, the effect control device 9 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (step S847).

  When the variation time timer has timed out (when the period from the variation start to the variation end has elapsed) (step S848), the effect control CPU 101 uses the effect control process flag value as the effect symbol change stop process (step The value is updated according to S804) (step S850). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S849), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S804). ) To a value according to Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S880). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S887. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S885. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in steps S881 to S886, etc. Without moving to step S887.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S881). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-line symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S882).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on that, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S882 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (step S883), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the effect control process flag as the variation pattern command. The value is updated according to the reception waiting process (step S800) (step S884).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S882, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S885), and sets the value of the execution number counter indicating the number of executions of the continuous notice. While clearing, the continuous notice execution flag is reset (step S886). As a result, even if the continuous notice for the number of executions of the continuous notice is not completed, the control of the continuous notice ends at this point. Then, it is confirmed whether or not a big hit start designation command reception flag (any of big hit start 1 designation command reception flag to big hit start 4 designation command reception flag) indicating that a big hit start designation command has been received is set (step S887). ). When the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S888), and outputs the sound number data corresponding to the fanfare effect to the sound output board 70 ( Step S889). Further, a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect is selected (step S890).

  When the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag. Then, by setting the process timer set value in the process timer, the process timer is started (step S891), and the effect device (as the effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1 and lamp control execution data 1) The control of the effect display device 9 and various lamps as effect parts is executed (step S892). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S805) (step S893).

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of sound number data output from the effect control board 80 to the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. 92, the sound number data includes sound number data corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol, sound number data during the big hit game, and sound number data corresponding to the continuous notices B and D. Note that audio data is set only for the continuous announcements B and D, but audio data may be set for other announcements.

  As described above, the effect control means as the effect control means reaches the result determined by the game control means at the time of starting winning (whether or not the big hit is generated based on the value of the random number extracted at the time of starting winning) )), It is determined whether or not to execute a continuous notice (hold notice), and if it is to be executed, the number of executions is determined. In addition, during the execution of the continuous notice, the notice effect in the form of notice A and notice B is not performed (because the process proceeds from step S811 to S821). If a big hit occurs, the continuous notice ends even if the continuous notice for the number of executions is not completed (see step S886).

  For example, when the effect display device 9 is changing the effect symbol, when an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is “4” and an effect control command designated for winning determination jackpot are received. Is assumed. Then, in the determination of whether or not to perform the continuous notice, it is determined that the continuous notice is given and the number of executions is four. Further, it is assumed that the determination result corresponding to the hold memory of 1, 2, 3 is not a big hit. In that case, after the change of the currently performed effect symbol is finished, a big hit occurs as a result of the fourth effect symbol change. In addition, after the change of the currently performed effect symbol is finished, the continuous notice effect is executed when the first to fourth effect symbols are changed. And the big hit occurs as a result of the variation of the fourth effect design. That is, it is possible to give a predetermined notification (that is, a notice effect) to the player during the change of the symbol of the previous time that the big hit is generated as a result of the change of the fourth effect symbol.

  Note that, for example, when an effect control command indicating that the number of reserved memories is “4” and an effect control command designated for winning prize determination jackpot are received, continuous notice is given in determining whether or not to perform a continuous notice. In particular, when the number of executions is 4, and the determination result corresponding to the pending storage of 3 is a big hit, a big hit occurs after two consecutive notices are executed. Ends.

  Further, the effect control means independently determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice and the number of executions based on the determination result command and the effect control command for designating the number of reserved memories. At that time, it is also determined uniquely which effect means (effect display device 9, lamp, speaker 27) is used. Furthermore, it is also decided uniquely in which production mode the continuous notice is performed. In the case where an effect movable member is provided, the effect control means also uniquely determines whether or not to use the movable member when executing the notice effect.

  FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing an example of the relationship between the control of the game control means and the effect control means related to the continuous notice, the transmission timing of the effect control command, and the operation of the effect means (effect display device 9, lamp, speaker 27). . When the game control means detects the occurrence of the start winning, in the effect setting process at the time of winning, the lottery result based on the start winning (the result of the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol to be executed in the future based on the start winning, Or not). In FIG. 93, the number shown to the right of “start winning prize” indicates an example of the number of reserved memories at that time. A determination result command based on the determination result (a winning determination judgment designation command, a winning judgment normal jackpot designation command or a winning judgment probability variation jackpot designation command) is transmitted to the presentation control means of the presentation control board 80. In addition, the pending control designation effect control command is transmitted before the determination result command is transmitted. Then, when the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is satisfied, an effect control command for designating a variation pattern indicating the start of variation of the effect symbol is transmitted from the game control means to the effect control means.

  When the effect control means receives an effect control command for holding storage designation, the effect control means updates the number of hold memories managed by itself, and determines continuous notice (see FIG. 79). When the effect control command designating the variation pattern is received, the effect display device 9 is controlled to start the variation of the effect symbol. As a result of the determination of the continuous notice, it is determined to perform the continuous notice. Controls so that the continuous notice effect is executed using part or all of the effect means (effect display device 9, lamp, speaker 27). In FIG. 93, it is determined that the continuous notice is made three times during the previous fluctuation, and it is determined that the continuous notice is performed in the third determination, and the symbol confirmation designation command is received from the game control means (FIG. 93). It is illustrated that the notice effect is started from the current variation (the variation indicated as “variation start” at the start time) after the previous variation is completed based on (not shown).

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag indicating that any of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands has been received is set (step S871). If any one of the big hit start 1 to 4 designation command reception flags is set, control is performed to display a game start screen corresponding to the set flag on the effect display device 9 (step S872). Further, the set flag (one of the big hit start 1-4 designation command reception flags) is reset (step S873). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805) (step S874).

  In step S872, if the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the production control CPU 101 performs a control to display a screen for informing the start of the small hit game on the production display device 9. When the jackpot start 1 designation command or jackpot start 3 designation command is received, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game (different from the screen for notifying the start of the jackpot game). Control to display on the screen. And when the big hit start 4 designation | designated command is received, control which displays the screen which alert | reports the start of a sudden probability change big hit game on the effect display apparatus 9 is performed. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the screen for informing the start of the small hit game and the screen for informing the start of the sudden probability change big hit game are the same screen.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S980). If the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer is not set, whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag (one of the jackpot end 1 to 3 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is set Confirmation is made (step S981). If the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag is reset (step S982), and a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (step S983). Then, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen (screen for notifying the end of the jackpot game) (step S984). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In the case of a small hit, since the big hit end designation command is not received, the CPU 101 for effect control does not execute steps S981 and S982, and the value corresponding to the small hit end display time is directly displayed in the big hit end effect timer. Is set (see step S983), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a small hit end screen (screen for informing the end of the small hit game) (see step S884). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) based on the fact that the effect period of the small hit end display has elapsed (see step S882). .

  In step S985, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S986). If not, the process ends. If the big hit end effect time has elapsed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S987).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the low-probability state (normal state, short-time state), the prize-setting effect setting process is executed, but in the high-probability state (probability variation state, latent probability variation state). Since the winning effect setting process is not executed (steps S216 and S217), in the high probability state, the winning determination result command is not transmitted to the effect controlling microcomputer 100, and the continuous notice determination is performed. Not executed. As a result, the continuous notice is not executed in the high probability state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who is in a high probability state from having a very advantageous state from being excessively expected and to prevent excessively high gambling.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table is switched according to whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state in the jackpot determination at the start of fluctuation, but the gaming state is a high probability state in the jackpot determination at the time of winning. Regardless of whether or not there is, it is always configured to determine using the jackpot determination table at normal time, because of the time difference between the execution timing of the jackpot determination at the time of winning and the execution timing of the jackpot determination at the start of fluctuation Thus, it is possible to avoid a contradiction between the content of the notice effect based on the determination result of the jackpot determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot determination at the start of variation. For example, if the jackpot determination execution timing at the time of winning a prize is a high probability state, but the jackpot determination execution timing at the start of fluctuation is shifted to a low probability state, the determination result of the jackpot determination at the time of winning is When it is decided that the big hit will be a big hit using the probability change big hit judgment table and the notice effect according to the decision result is executed, the judgment result of the big hit judgment at the start of fluctuation is out of the normal big hit judgment table When the decision is made, a situation occurs in which a big hit is not made even though a notice effect (especially a notice effect for determining the big hit) is executed. However, in the jackpot determination at the time of winning a prize, it is possible to avoid such a situation if the determination is always made using the normal jackpot determination table regardless of whether the gaming state is a high probability state or not. As a result, the player can be prevented from feeling distrust.

  In this embodiment, as the types of big hits, normal big hits, probability variation big hits (first probability variation big hits, second probability variation big hits, third probability variation big hits), and sudden probability variation big hits are provided, which differ depending on the types of big hits. Since it is configured to execute a notice effect (see FIG. 40, FIG. 41, etc.), it is possible to make the player recognize which kind of jackpot effect is to be made and to improve the interest of the game Can do. Note that only the notice effect X shown in FIG. 40 was made as the notice effect according to the probability variation jackpot, but different notice effects may be provided depending on the types of the first probability variation big hit, the second probability variation big hit, and the third probability variation big hit. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution of the predetermined notice effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 is prohibited until the big hit gaming state is started after the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the predetermined notice effect. In other words, when a start winning with the display result of variable display as a big win symbol occurs, a predetermined effect is performed, and then the predetermined effect is not executed until a big hit occurs, The player can easily grasp at what time the start prize is met.

  In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number based on the determination result of whether or not to reach the jackpot determination determination result, and the variation A variation pattern is determined from among the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type using a random number for pattern determination. Then, if it is determined to be reach, it is determined as one of a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the reach state, and a variation pattern with a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type according to the reach state is determined. Decide either. Further, when it is determined not to reach, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types corresponding to the non-reach state is determined, and a plurality of types of reach included in the variation pattern type corresponding to the non-reach state are accompanied. Determine any of the fluctuation patterns. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects not only when reaching the reach state but also when not reaching the reach state without increasing the program capacity.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the notice type (notice type (1) or notice type (2)) is determined using the random number (SR7-1) for determining the first sub notice pattern type. The control flow can be simplified and the control burden can be reduced. That is, whether or not to execute the notice effect of the notice type (1) and the effect pattern are determined, and whether or not the notice effect of the notice type (2) is executed and the effect pattern are further determined, and then the notice type Random numbers for determining the first sub-notice pattern type are set earlier than the case of determining which of the notice effects of (1) and the notice effect of (2) is to be executed. The method of determining the notice type by using it and then patterning the notice effect of the decided notice type after that can simplify the control flow and reduce the control burden. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, when the notice type is determined using a random number for determining the sub notice type, the appearance rate of the notice effect of the notice type (1) and the notice effect of the notice type (2) can be easily set to an arbitrary value. The design burden can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the winning judgment normal jackpot designation command and the winning judgment positive variation jackpot designation command are used as the winning judgment jackpot designation command of the judgment result command. Regardless, one winning determination jackpot designation command may be used. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a big hit is made regardless of whether it is a normal big hit or a probable change big hit in the determination of the big hit when the start winning occurs. Send a winning jackpot designation command for.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the start opening switch passing process is configured not to execute the winning effect setting process in the high probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the starting opening switch passing process is performed. In this case, the effect setting process at the time of winning is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state, and instead, in the command analysis processing, the determination of the continuous notice is not performed when the probability state is high. Also good. The second embodiment showing such a configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a start port switch passage process in the second embodiment. In the start port switch passing process in the second embodiment, step S216 of the start port switch passing process in the first embodiment is deleted. In other words, the winning effect setting process is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. Other configurations are the same as those described in FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a part of command analysis processing in the second embodiment. In the command analysis processing in the second embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the state is a high probability state (step S635A), and only when the state is not a high probability state (N of step S635A), the processing of steps S635 to S650 (determination of continuous notice) Etc.) is executed. The effect control CPU 101 can recognize the gaming state based on the background designation command and set a flag according to the gaming state, so that the current gaming state can be confirmed by the flag. Other configurations are the same as those described in FIG.

  Even with such a configuration, as in the first embodiment, in the high probability state, the winning determination result command is not received by the production control microcomputer 100, and the determination of continuous notice is not executed. . As a result, the continuous notice is not executed in the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a high probability state from having excessive expectation when the player is in a very advantageous state, and to prevent excessively high gambling.

  In addition to the above configuration, in the start port switch passing process, the winning effect setting process is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. Even if the control for transmitting the determination result designation command at the time of winning is prohibited, in the high probability state, the determination result command at the time of winning is not transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100, and the determination of the continuous notice is made. It will not be executed, and the continuous notice will not be executed in the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having a high probability state from having excessive expectation when the player is in a very advantageous state, and to prevent excessively high gambling.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In Embodiments 1 and 2 described above, the configuration is such that continuous notice is not executed when in a high probability state, but even if it is in a high probability state, the previous big hit is a sudden probability change big hit of two rounds. For example, it is considered that it is not an excessively advantageous state because it did not win the ball in the previous jackpot (almost never). Therefore, in the third embodiment, the continuous notice is executed when the transition to the high probability state is made based on the occurrence of a sudden probability variation jackpot of 2 rounds, but based on the occurrence of a probability variation jackpot of 15 rounds. Therefore, when the state is shifted to a high probability state, continuous notice is not made. In the third embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, the winning effect setting process is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state, and the winning determination result command corresponding to the determination result is executed. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing conditions for turning on and off the effect probability variation flag and the suddenness flag in the third embodiment. When the display result designation command designating the 15-round probability variation jackpot is received, only the production probability variation flag is turned on, and when the display result designation command designating the 2-round sudden probability variation jackpot is received, the production probability variation flag and the suddenness flag Turn on either of these. In addition, when the display result designation command designating the 15-round normal big hit is received, both the effect variation flag for production and the suddenness flag are turned off.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a part of command analysis processing in the third embodiment. In the starting port switch passing process at this time, step S216 is deleted as in the starting port switch passing process in the second embodiment. In other words, the winning effect setting process is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state. In the command analysis processing in the third embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the state is a high probability state (step S635B). If the state is a high probability state (Y in step S635B), it is determined whether or not the previous big hit is a sudden probability variation big hit. The determination is made based on the effect probability change flag and the suddenness flag (step S635C). When the previous big hit is suddenly a probable big hit (Y in step S635C), the processing in steps S635 to S650 (processing for determining the continuous notice, etc.) is executed. Other configurations are the same as those described in FIG.

  As described above, even in the case of a high probability state, if the previous big hit is a two-round sudden probability change big hit with few (almost) no balls, the winning determination result command is output by the microcomputer 100 for effect control. Received and continuous notice can be executed. Therefore, if it is an excessively advantageous state (a state in which it is controlled to a high-probability state where it is easy to win a round of 15 rounds and become a big hit), it is prohibited to carry out continuous notices and to provoke euphoria. On the other hand, if it is not an excessively advantageous state, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by controlling the continuous notice to be executable.

  In addition to the above configuration, in the start-port switch passing process, it is confirmed whether or not a high probability state, and if it is a high probability state, whether or not the previous big hit was a sudden probability variation big hit, If a sudden hit is a promising big hit, the winning effect setting process is executed, but if the previous big win is a 15-round probable big hit, the winning effect setting process may not be executed. In addition, in the start opening switch passing process, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state, the winning effect setting process is executed, but in the winning effect setting process, it is confirmed whether it is a high probability state, In the case of a high probability state, it is checked whether or not the previous big hit was suddenly probable big hit, and if the previous big hit was suddenly probable big hit, the control to send the winning judgment result designation command is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which control for transmitting a winning determination result designation command is prohibited when the big hit is a probable big hit of 15 rounds.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In the fourth embodiment, whether or not the continuous notice can be executed is determined not only based on whether the state is a high probability state but also whether the state is a high base state. In the fourth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state, a winning effect setting process is executed, and a winning determination result command corresponding to the determination result is executed. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a part of command analysis processing according to the fourth embodiment. In the command analysis processing according to the fourth embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the state is a high probability state (step S635D). If the state is a high probability state (Y in step S635D), it is confirmed whether or not the state is a high base state. (Step S635E). If it is not in the high base state (Y in step S635E), the processing in steps S635 to S650 (processing for determining continuous notice, etc.) is executed. Other configurations are the same as those described in FIG.

  As described above, when in the high probability state and the low base state, it is not so advantageous for the player, so it is controlled so that continuous notice can be executed without excessive gambling, and in the high probability state. In the high base state, since it is a very advantageous state for the player, the continuous notice is controlled so as not to be executed so as not to excessively increase happiness. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations and excessively increasing gambling.

  In addition to the above configuration, in the start switch passing process, it is confirmed whether the state is a high probability state, and if the state is a high probability state, it is confirmed whether the state is a high base state. Performs the winning effect setting process, but may be configured not to execute the winning effect setting process in the high base state. In addition, in the start opening switch passing process, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state, the winning effect setting process is executed, but in the winning effect setting process, it is confirmed whether it is a high probability state, If it is in the high probability state, it is checked whether it is in the high base state, and if it is in the low base state, the control to send the winning judgment result designation command is executed. The configuration may be such that control for sending commands is prohibited.

Embodiment 5 FIG.
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (that is, a high probability state, a high probability state and the previous big hit is a probability variation big hit of 15 rounds, a high probability state and high It has been decided whether or not to perform continuous notice to notify (predict) that it is a base state), a big hit or a possibility of a big hit, but a predetermined condition is met In this case, the specific type of big hit continuous notice is controlled so as not to be executable, but the jackpot continuous notice other than the specific type of big hit may be controlled to be executable. This is because, for example, a continuous notice for notifying that a probable big hit will occur increases the player's expectation over other continuous notices for notifying other big hits, and therefore may cause excessive gambling. In the fifth embodiment, similarly to the case shown in FIG. 96 of the second embodiment, the winning effect setting process is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state.

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a winning effect setting process in the fifth embodiment. In the winning effect setting process in the fifth embodiment, before performing the control to transmit the winning determination result designation command, it is confirmed whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S228A). Executes control to transmit a winning determination result designation command. If it is in a high probability state, it is checked whether or not the jackpot type determined in step S227 is a probable variation jackpot (step S228B), and if it is a probable variation jackpot, control is performed so as not to transmit a winning determination result designation command. If it is not a promising big hit, the other configuration for executing the control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command is the same as that described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when it is determined to be a high probability state and a probable big hit, a very advantageous notice will be given in a very advantageous state for the player, so there is a risk of overly expecting However, according to the configuration as described above, since it is configured not to transmit the determination result designation command at the time of winning when it is determined that it is a high probability state and a probable big hit, it will excessively give a sense of expectation. Can be prevented.

  In addition to the above configuration, when it is determined in the determination of the continuous notice that the continuous notice X (the notice of the probability change big hit confirmation) is to be executed, control may be performed so that such a notice is not executed. For example, it may be possible to replace with another notice (for example, continuous notice Y) or not to execute the notice itself.

Embodiment 6 FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the continuous notice of the probability variation big hit determination is controlled so as not to be executed. Even if it exists, it is controlled to be executable. This is because if the continuous notice of the probability variation jackpot confirmation (continuous notice X) is executed during the control of the probability variation state, the probability variation jackpot notice is performed in a very advantageous gaming state, so that the gambling nature is overkilled. This is because, if it is a notice other than the probable big hit, it is considered that the gambling is not overly envy even when controlled to the probable state. In the sixth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state, a winning effect setting process is executed, and a winning determination result command corresponding to the determination result is executed. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice type (1) determination table in the probability variation state according to the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 76 (C), a notice X (notice of confirming a probable big hit) is set and a determination value is assigned to the notice X. However, in FIG. 102 (C), the notice X is not set. Other configurations are the same as those shown in FIG. 76 (FIGS. 76A, 76B, and 76D).

  In the determination of the continuous notice shown in FIG. 79, if the CPU 101 for effect control determines that the continuous notice of the notice type (1) is not being executed (N in step S673), is the current gaming state in a certain change state? Determine whether or not. When it is determined that the gaming state is not the probability variation state but the normal state, the notice type (1) determination table shown in FIG. 76 is selected, and when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability variation state, FIG. The determination table for the notice type (1) in the probability variation state shown in FIG. Then, a notice effect pattern for continuous notice is determined using the selected notice type (1) determination table (step S681). Note that the processing in steps S670 to S672, S677, S680, S681, S683, and S684 is the same as that described with reference to FIG. In the starting port switch passing process at this time, step S216 is deleted as in the starting port switch passing process in the second embodiment. In other words, the winning effect setting process is executed regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state.

  As described above, when the control is being performed in the probability changing state, the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined using the table for the notice type (1) in which the notice effect (notice effect X) for determining the probability change big hit is not set. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of excessive gambling.

  In the sixth embodiment, for example, the probability variation big hit that is further advantageous in the probability variation state that is an advantageous gaming state is not notified, but in the advantageous state, it is more advantageous to the player out of the big hit. What is necessary is just to regulate the notice effect which alert | reports a big hit. For example, time savings is a more advantageous gaming state than non-time savings, and when there is a case where a time reduction is added or not after a big hit, a time reduction is added when a big hit that adds time reduction is determined in the time reduction You may be allowed to restrict the notice effect for the big hit, and if there is a case where a certain change is added after the big hit and there is a case where a certain change is not added, the notice effect corresponding to the big hit that adds a certain change in a short time will be restricted. do it.

Embodiment 7 FIG.
18 is a flowchart showing a big hit end process in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the command transmission prohibition flag is reset in the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 103 (step S151A). In this case, the process of resetting the command transmission prohibition flag in the pre-opening process for the special winning opening is omitted. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the execution of the predetermined notice effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 is prohibited until the big hit gaming state starts after the effect control microcomputer 100 starts the predetermined notice effect. However, in the seventh embodiment, a predetermined control by the effect control microcomputer 100 starts after the effect control microcomputer 100 starts a predetermined notice effect until the jackpot gaming state ends. It is configured to prohibit the execution of the notice effect. Even with such a configuration, the player can easily grasp when the big hit corresponds to the start winning prize.

  In the above-described embodiment, even if the command prohibition flag is set in the game control microcomputer 560, the value of the random R (random number for jackpot determination) extracted at the time of winning the start matches the jackpot determination value. Is executed (the jackpot determination module corresponding to the pre-start determination process is executed), but it is controlled not to transmit the determination result command (see steps S222 and S223 in FIG. 18), that is, start The previous effect prohibiting unit allows execution of the pre-start determination process, but prohibits execution of a predetermined notice effect by the effect control microcomputer 100 by prohibiting transmission of a command by the determination result command transmitting unit. However, it is confirmed whether or not the command prohibition flag is set before executing the process of step S222. And, the command prohibition flag may not perform the processing of step S222 when I is set. That is, the pre-start production prohibiting means may prohibit the execution of the predetermined notice production by the production control microcomputer 100 by prohibiting the execution of the pre-start determination process.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to always be able to transmit the command based on the determination process of the pre-start determination process and the determination process of the pre-start determination process. The prohibition flag may be set at the start timing of the frame lamp flash lighting shown in FIG. 53 (see B in FIG. 53), and the prohibition flag may be reset when the effect during the big hit game ends. In such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 ignores the determination result command received when the prohibition flag is set.

  In addition, if the display result is a big hit when it is detected that the display result will be a big hit before the start of the symbol change that makes the display result a big hit, the display result will be displayed. When it is not detected that the display result is a big hit, the symbol change time (the time from the start of the change until the display result is derived and displayed) that is executed before the big hit symbol change actually starts On the other hand, there was a gaming machine configured to change. For example, when it is detected that the display result is a big hit, before the fluctuation of the symbol that makes the display result a big hit is actually started, a fluctuation pattern (with a long time reach effect) There were gaming machines that selected a high percentage of fluctuation patterns. In such a gaming machine, since the fluctuation time is prolonged, as a result, the time (digestion time) until the reserved memory number is consumed (decreased) may be lengthened, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. However, in the above embodiment, regardless of the determination result (see steps S225, S229, S230, S232) in the winning effect setting process shown in FIG. (Variation time) is determined, so there is no risk of disadvantage to the player.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the determination result command and the pending storage number designation command separately. May be combined into one command. In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 can specify the number of reserved memories and one command (determination result / holding storage designation command: However, in the case of an outage, it is usually a big hit In this case, there are three types corresponding to each of the cases of probability variation big hits). The example shown in FIG. 18 will be described. Instead of using C300 (H), C301 (H), C302 (H), and E000 (H), for example, MODE data is set to E3 (H), and EXT data Data indicating the determination result of the pre-start determination means is set in the upper 4 bits in 8 bits, and a command in which the value of the reserved memory number or the data indicating that the reserved memory number is increased is set in the lower 4 bits is determined result / held Use the memory specification command. In this case, when the command prohibition flag is set, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the determination result / holding storage designation command in which the data for specifying the disregard is set regardless of the determination result in the winning effect setting process. Send.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the pending storage designation command. In that case, when receiving the determination result command, the production control microcomputer 100 considers that the number of reserved memories has increased by one. Further, in this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a winning determination judgment command when the command prohibition flag is set. Further, when the command prohibition flag is set, a command indicating that execution of a predetermined effect is prohibited may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the display result of the variation of the symbol based on the start winning is a big hit symbol when the starting winning occurs. When the variable display is started, if the hold memory is not 0, all of the hold memories are targeted to determine whether or not the jackpot determination random numbers in the hold memory match the jackpot determination value. For example, a winning determination jackpot designation command may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the configuration in which one special symbol display 8 is provided is illustrated, but two special symbol indicators (A, B) each variably displaying a special symbol are provided. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine. In that case, two start ports (A, B) corresponding to each special symbol display (A, B) are provided, and four hold memories are also provided, for a total of eight. And, when the big hit determination is made in the winning determination of the winning to the starting opening A corresponding to the special symbol display A, the command transmission prohibition process of the winning determination is executed for both starting openings. Is desirable. By controlling in such a manner, it is possible to prevent a predetermined notice from being duplicated (a notice to execute continuous change is executed) if the prohibition is individually determined. This effect can be obtained even if the two special symbol indicators can be changed simultaneously, or can be changed alternately (starting winning order).

  In addition, in the case where two special symbol indicators (A, B) are provided and the variation on the special symbol indicator B side is executed preferentially first, the special symbol indicator which is the priority side is displayed. It is desirable to perform the winning determination only for the start winning corresponding to the device B. If the determination at the time of winning is performed for the start winning corresponding to the special symbol display A which is the non-priority side, the jackpot holding memory is stored for the special symbol display A, and then the start winning for the special symbol display B is performed. If it continues (holding memory does not become 0), even if a notice is executed, a big hit will not occur easily, and there is a possibility that the interest will be lowered.

  When two special symbol indicators (A, B) are provided, a big hit judgment table used for big hit judgment on one special symbol indicator A side and a big hit judgment on the other special symbol indicator B side A jackpot determination table used in the above may be provided, and the distribution of the determination values for the jackpot and loss may be made different. Also, a table used for determining the big hit type on one special symbol display A side and a table used for determining the big hit type on the other special symbol display B side may be provided, and the allocation of the determination value for the big hit type may be different. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 4). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Note that the above embodiments and modifications can be combined as appropriate according to the content of the gaming machine.

It can be said that the present invention is a gaming machine having the following contents.
Provided with a variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the passing of the game medium through the start area provided in the game area, and displays the display result as a specific display A gaming machine that transitions to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when it results,
A gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state with a high probability of determining to control to the specific gaming state as compared to a normal state after completion of the specific gaming state;
Detecting means for detecting that the game medium has passed through the starting area;
Start information used for determining that the specific gaming state is set as a right to perform variable display when the detecting means is detected by the detecting means and that the special gaming state is controlled after the special gaming state ends. Holding storage means for storing;
When starting variable display based on the right stored in the holding storage means, it is determined to control to the specific gaming state when the start information that is the right is specific information, and the start that is the right Pre-determining means for determining to control to the specific gaming state when the information is special information, and determining to control to the special gaming state after completion of the special gaming state;
For the variable display of the identification information that is performed to derive and display the display result according to the determination result determined when the start information of 1 is used as the start information of the pre-determining means, from the start information of 1 The variable display is not started until the display result corresponding to the determination result determined when the previously stored stored start information is used as the start information of the prior determination means is derived and displayed. The starting information is stored by the holding storage means, and the starting of the first is performed after deriving and displaying the display result according to the determination result determined when the stored starting information is used as the starting information of the pre-decision means A variable table for starting variable display for deriving and displaying a display result corresponding to a determination result determined when information is used as starting information for the pre-decision means, and then deriving and displaying the display result A variable display control means for executing control,
Storage determination means for making a predetermined determination on the starting information stored in the holding storage;
Display according to the determination result determined when the stored start information stored by the holding storage unit prior to the start information determined by the storage determination unit is used as the start information of the prior determination unit A game machine comprising: a notice effect execution means for executing a notice effect using a performance device provided in the gaming machine based on the determination result of the memory determination means during variable display performed until the result is derived and displayed. .

  The present invention can be suitably applied to a gaming machine that produces an effect for notifying a display result of variable display before variable display of identification information is started.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 15 Variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and can be controlled to a specific state advantageous to the player,
The variable display of the second identification information is executed in preference to the variable display of the first identification information,
First hold storage means for storing variable display of the first identification information not yet started as hold storage;
Second hold storage means for storing variable display of the second identification information not yet started as hold storage;
Determining means for determining whether to control to the specific state;
Advantageous state control means for controlling to an advantageous state capable of increasing the frequency of execution of variable display of the second identification information;
A determination unit that determines whether or not the specific state is controlled before determination by the determination unit;
A specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determining means,
Unlike the production mode in the advantageous state and the production mode in the predetermined state,
The determination means determines whether or not to be controlled to the specific state with the hold storage stored in the second hold storage means as a determination target when being controlled to the advantageous state. Machine.

Images